<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" standalone="no"?><?xml-stylesheet href="http://www.blogger.com/styles/atom.css" type="text/css"?><rss xmlns:itunes="http://www.itunes.com/dtds/podcast-1.0.dtd" version="2.0"><channel><title>Digital Photography</title><description></description><managingEditor>noreply@blogger.com (A A)</managingEditor><pubDate>Fri, 4 Oct 2024 21:05:33 -0700</pubDate><generator>Blogger http://www.blogger.com</generator><openSearch:totalResults xmlns:openSearch="http://a9.com/-/spec/opensearchrss/1.0/">30</openSearch:totalResults><openSearch:startIndex xmlns:openSearch="http://a9.com/-/spec/opensearchrss/1.0/">1</openSearch:startIndex><openSearch:itemsPerPage xmlns:openSearch="http://a9.com/-/spec/opensearchrss/1.0/">25</openSearch:itemsPerPage><link>http://about-digital-photography-0.blogspot.com/</link><language>en-us</language><itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit><itunes:image href="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-1/flowers-1-1.jpg"/><itunes:keywords>Digital,Photography,Photography,photoshop,adobe,adobe,photoshop,digital,photo,photo,photo,shoot,photo,graphed,picture,photos,photography,professional,photography</itunes:keywords><itunes:summary>Digital Photography tips</itunes:summary><itunes:subtitle>Digital Photography</itunes:subtitle><itunes:category text="Technology"><itunes:category text="Gadgets"/></itunes:category><itunes:owner><itunes:email>naswarman.com.pk@gmail.com</itunes:email></itunes:owner><xhtml:meta content="noindex" name="robots" xmlns:xhtml="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"/><item><title/><link>http://about-digital-photography-0.blogspot.com/2011/11/blog-post.html</link><pubDate>Sat, 19 Nov 2011 04:38:00 -0800</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-2842667588749990803.post-4913197285694774556</guid><description>&lt;div dir="ltr" style="text-align: left;" trbidi="on"&gt;
&lt;div class="separator" style="clear: both; text-align: center;"&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;a href="https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/img/b/R29vZ2xl/AVvXsEhrJZZu1_Kf-I4z6xKFDPiKZ9lFgbxMbH_E_XpNhQ-qjIzDybWJrOjo2cOH6GSdeiD8T6p1K8jIWyfIGrMOfFxhco_j09uHu3i8C3QxYD3nk8S2kZSjqzfdOP_RvPVY8IX2lEJCr3CGXyE/s1600/digitaldesign.jpg" imageanchor="1" style="clear: left; float: left; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-right: 1em;"&gt;&lt;img border="0" height="400" src="https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/img/b/R29vZ2xl/AVvXsEhrJZZu1_Kf-I4z6xKFDPiKZ9lFgbxMbH_E_XpNhQ-qjIzDybWJrOjo2cOH6GSdeiD8T6p1K8jIWyfIGrMOfFxhco_j09uHu3i8C3QxYD3nk8S2kZSjqzfdOP_RvPVY8IX2lEJCr3CGXyE/s400/digitaldesign.jpg" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;div class="separator" style="clear: both; text-align: center;"&gt;
&lt;a href="https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/img/b/R29vZ2xl/AVvXsEhrJZZu1_Kf-I4z6xKFDPiKZ9lFgbxMbH_E_XpNhQ-qjIzDybWJrOjo2cOH6GSdeiD8T6p1K8jIWyfIGrMOfFxhco_j09uHu3i8C3QxYD3nk8S2kZSjqzfdOP_RvPVY8IX2lEJCr3CGXyE/s1600/digitaldesign.jpg" imageanchor="1" style="clear: left; float: left; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-right: 1em;"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a href="https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/img/b/R29vZ2xl/AVvXsEjLEYkcgiRCuYdfGIFmnBt07YbTQDzCRPvdNmeoc46X3n0fepl2Jmni3obTfTosmWklKe0EHBuAtFQ1J8DCzgDCH33A-_P_eXAYcTEGvBKU5kG-G0YYbngBT9Qk-kioAKSKotfW-BFX-b0/s1600/canon-1000D-cutaway.jpg" imageanchor="1" style="clear: left; float: left; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-right: 1em;"&gt;&lt;img border="0" height="400" src="https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/img/b/R29vZ2xl/AVvXsEjLEYkcgiRCuYdfGIFmnBt07YbTQDzCRPvdNmeoc46X3n0fepl2Jmni3obTfTosmWklKe0EHBuAtFQ1J8DCzgDCH33A-_P_eXAYcTEGvBKU5kG-G0YYbngBT9Qk-kioAKSKotfW-BFX-b0/s400/canon-1000D-cutaway.jpg" width="370" /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</description><media:thumbnail xmlns:media="http://search.yahoo.com/mrss/" height="72" url="https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/img/b/R29vZ2xl/AVvXsEhrJZZu1_Kf-I4z6xKFDPiKZ9lFgbxMbH_E_XpNhQ-qjIzDybWJrOjo2cOH6GSdeiD8T6p1K8jIWyfIGrMOfFxhco_j09uHu3i8C3QxYD3nk8S2kZSjqzfdOP_RvPVY8IX2lEJCr3CGXyE/s72-c/digitaldesign.jpg" width="72"/><thr:total xmlns:thr="http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0">0</thr:total><author>naswarman.com.pk@gmail.com (A A)</author></item><item><title>How to Photograph Flowers -- Part I</title><link>http://about-digital-photography-0.blogspot.com/2011/11/how-to-photograph-flowers-part-i.html</link><pubDate>Tue, 15 Nov 2011 03:19:00 -0800</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-2842667588749990803.post-8588239828871943783</guid><description>&lt;div dir="ltr" style="text-align: left;" trbidi="on"&gt;
&lt;div class="text_block"&gt;

    &lt;h1&gt;
How to Photograph Flowers -- Part I&lt;/h1&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
Article and Photography by Ron Bigelow&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
www.ronbigelow.com&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    There are few subjects that draw photographers as much as  
flowers. Why shouldn’t it be so? After all, flowers seem to  offer the 
photographer so much: striking hues, graceful curves, and dramatic  
color contrast. It’s no wonder  that so many people photograph flowers.&lt;br /&gt;

    Furthermore, it all seems so easy – just point the camera  at one
 of the beautiful blooms and release the shutter. Unfortunately, the 
images  that result often do not depict the beauty that the eye 
perceived. The reality  is that it is easy to get a picture of a flower;
 it is not so easy to create  an image that portrays the elegance, 
beauty, and intricate detail that the  flower displays.&lt;br /&gt;

    Like any other area of photography, creating flower  images that 
rise above the ordinary requires knowledge and skill. However, once  
mastered, the knowledge and skill will lead to dramatic flower images.&lt;br /&gt;

    This three part article series covers both the  technical and 
artistic aspects of flower photography. Part I of the series   covers 
the technical aspects while Part II and Part III  cover the artistic. 
Now, one might be tempted to think of the technical aspects as boring  
and want to bypass them in order to go straight to the fun, artistic 
stuff.  This would be a mistake. The technical aspects form the 
foundation for the  artistic work. Without  a firm understanding of the 
basics of equipment; light; white balance;  exposure; and wind, the 
artistic efforts are likely to result in disappointing  flower images.&lt;br /&gt;

    So, in order to create powerful flower images, one must  first 
become a skilled technician (Part I), then, a creative artist (Part II  
and Part III).&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;h3 align="center"&gt;
Equipment&lt;/h3&gt;
In addition to a good camera, several pieces of equipment  will make photographing flowers more enjoyable and successful.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="bold"&gt;Tripod:&lt;/span&gt; A  tripod is essential for 
flower photography. Often, the light during  flower photography is 
fairly low. This occurs for a couple of reasons.  First, flowers are 
often found in areas of shade (such as the forest). Second,  low light 
levels (such as an overcast sky) often produce the best flower  images. 
Consequently, slower shutter speeds are often required to compensate  
for the low light levels. In addition, for closer flower shots, smaller 
apertures  will be required (unless a very shallow depth of field is 
desired). The smaller  apertures will require slower shutter speeds. A 
tripod will allow the use of  slower shutter speeds without the blurring
 that will occur if the camera is  hand held (blurring due to wind will 
be covered later).&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 1: Tripod with Legs Spread out&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="400" id="Placeholder" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-1/flowers-1-1.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="332" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Since most flowers are fairly low to the ground, it  is essential
 that the tripod allow the camera to get very low.  There are a couple 
of ways that this can be done. Some tripods have legs that  can be 
unlocked and spread out (see Figure 1).&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 2: Tripod with Center Column Reversed&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="266" id="Placeholder2" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-1/flowers-1-2.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Additionally, many tripods allow the center column to be reversed
 (see Figure 2). Of course, the best situation is to own a tripod that 
can do both.&lt;br /&gt;

    If much walking or hiking is expected, the tripod weight  will 
become an issue. This results in a problem. Heavy tripods are sturdy, 
but  they are tiring to carry around all day. Light tripods are easy to 
carry, but  many are not very steady. One solution is to use a carbon 
fiber tripod. Carbon  fiber tripods are both sturdy and fairly light 
weight. The down side is the  cost. Carbon fiber tripods are much more 
expensive than aluminum tripods.&lt;br /&gt;

    Last, it is preferable to use a tripod that has three  section 
legs. Four section legs allow the tripod to be collapsed to a shorter  
length, but they are less sturdy than three section legs.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_break"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 3: Tripod Head&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="400" id="Placeholder3" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-1/flowers-1-3.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="336" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class="bold"&gt;Tripod  Head:&lt;/span&gt; Most nature photographers
 prefer ballheads. It is  preferable that the ballhead have panning 
ability. Also, the ballhead should  have one knob for locking down the 
head and another knob for adjusting the head  tension Figure 3).&lt;br /&gt;

    Of course, the ballhead needs to be sturdy enough to  support the
 weight of the camera and lens. This is particularly true when a  longer
 lens is used.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next_break"&gt;

    &lt;span class="bold"&gt;Lenses:&lt;/span&gt; To  make the most of a flower 
excursion, a few lenses will be needed. To  capture a field of flowers, a
 wide angle lens will be needed. A normal lens  will be required for 
those times when a smaller group of flowers are being  photographed. 
Telephoto lenses can be used when it is necessary to compress  distances
 (e.g., to make flowers appear close together). Of course, an  
alternative is to use a zoom lens that covers all the focal lengths that
 might  be required.&lt;br /&gt;

    However, sooner or later, most serious flower  photographers want
 to move in close. This requires some special equipment. Four  of the 
most common approaches to photographing close-up are:&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Close-up lens&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Extension tube&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Teleconverter&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Macro lens&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
A close-up lens looks more like a filter than a lens. It screws 
on the front of a regular lens and allows the lens to focus closer.  The
 advantages of a close-up lens are that it is inexpensive, is small and 
 light weight, and does not reduce the amount of light that reaches the 
lens.  The disadvantage of a close up lens is that a close-up lens 
generally has lower optical quality  than a high grade lens. Therefore, 
the use of a close-up lens will likely  degrade image quality somewhat.&lt;br /&gt;

    An extension tube fits between the lens and the camera body.  An 
extension tube is essentially a hollow tube that contains no lens 
elements. An extension  tube moves the lens farther from the sensor; 
this allows the lens to focus  closer. The advantages of an extension 
tube are that it is  inexpensive, is  small and light weight, and will 
not degrade image quality. The disadvantage of   an extension tube is 
that it will decrease the amount of light that reaches the  sensor.&lt;br /&gt;

    A teleconverter is similar to an extension tube in that  it fits 
between the lens and the camera. However, a teleconverter does contain  
lens elements. A teleconvertor increases the focal length of a lens, but
 it does  not change the minimum focus distance. This results in an 
increase in  magnification. The advantages of a teleconverter are that 
it is less expensive  than a lens (but more expensive than a close-up 
lens or an extension tube), is relatively small  and light weight, and 
causes little or no image degradation (at least the high  quality ones 
don’t). The downside is that a teleconverter will decrease the  amount 
of light that reaches the sensor (usually resulting in a one or two stop
  light lose).&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 4: Macro Lens&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="230" id="Placeholder4" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-1/flowers-1-4.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
While close-up lenses, extension tubes, and teleconverters  get 
the job done, the gold standard for close-up work is the macro lens (see
  Figure 4). A macro lens is a highly corrected lens that is designed to
 focus  very close to the subject. Many macro lenses create a life size 
(1:1) image on  the sensor. However, some specialty macro lenses can 
focus even closer. The advantage of a macro lens is the very high 
quality  images that it creates. The disadvantages are that a macro lens
 is larger and  heavier than the previously covered options. In 
addition, a macro lens is generally  expensive (a good macro  lens can 
easily cost over $1,000).&lt;br /&gt;

    One thing to keep in mind when considering a macro lens  is that a
 macro lens around 150mm to 200mm is generally preferred to a shorter  
macro lens for two reasons. First, a longer macro lens provides more 
working  distance between the lens and the subject. This is particularly
 important if  subjects, such as shy bugs, will be photographed in 
addition to flowers. Second,  a longer macro lens has a shallower depth 
of field which makes it easier  to blur the background so that the 
background does not distract from the  subject.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="bold"&gt;Shutter Release:&lt;/span&gt; Just because a camera 
 is on a tripod doesn't mean that the camera will be steady. The simple 
act of  releasing the shutter can cause vibrations that will cause a 
loss of sharpness.  One problem is that pressing the shutter almost 
ensures that a certain amount  of vibration will be transmitted to the 
camera. The solution is simple. The  shutter needs to be released 
without the photographer touching the camera at  the time of the shutter
 release.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1ls_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ls_2"&gt;
Figure 5: Remote Switch&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="401" id="Placeholder5" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-1/flowers-1-5.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="267" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
The answer is to use a remote switch to release the  shutter. A 
remote switch is a device that allows a photographer to release the  
shutter, by using a hand held device, without the photographer's hand 
directly  touching the camera. This device triggers the camera shutter 
by mechanical or  electrical means. Some shutter releases attach 
directly to the camera through a  cable. Other devices are wireless and 
trigger the shutter through the  use of electromagnetic waves. Figure 5 
shows a remote switch attached to a  camera. Remote switches run the 
gamut from basic, inexpensive units that provide  only for the remote 
release of the shutter to more advanced, expensive units  that have 
electronic functionality that provides for more sophisticated control  
of the camera.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section"&gt;
&lt;span class="bold"&gt;Polarizer:&lt;/span&gt; A  polarizer
 can improve flower images in a couple of ways. First, polarizers can  
help reduce glare. Second, polarizers can improve the saturation of the 
flowers  and the surrounding environment.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_break"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 6: Reflector&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="370" id="Placeholder6" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-1/flowers-1-6.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class="bold"&gt;Reflector:&lt;/span&gt;  Small,  collapsible 
reflectors (see Figure 6) are great for reflecting some extra light  
onto flowers (especially the undersides of the flowers). These 
reflectors  generally come in white, silver, gold, or a combination of 
these colors. White  reflectors reflect a soft light of relatively low 
intensity. Silver reflectors  reflect the brightest, coldest, harshest 
light. Gold reflectors warm up the  light. Reflectors that have a 
combination of silver and gold reflect a good  amount of warm toned 
light.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 7: Diffuser&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="391" id="Placeholder7" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-1/flowers-1-7.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class="bold"&gt;Diffuser:&lt;/span&gt;  A  collapsible diffuser 
looks very much like a reflector (see Figure 7). The  difference is that
 a diffuser allows a portion of the light to pass through.  The light is
 diffused in the process resulting in a much softer light. This is  
especially important for those times when the flowers are in direct 
sunlight.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3 align="center"&gt;
Light&lt;/h3&gt;
One of the most important factors in creating great  flower 
images is the light. Without the proper lighting conditions, it will be 
 very difficult to get impressive looking flower shots.&lt;br /&gt;

    Light has four main properties:&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Quality&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Color&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Saturation&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Direction&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;span class="bold"&gt;Quality:&lt;/span&gt; Light  can be either soft or hard.&lt;br /&gt;

    Soft light is a very diffused and flattering light. Soft  light 
has low contrast. The bright areas and shadow areas tend to blend  
together easily. The transitions between sunlight and shadow tend to be 
gradual.&lt;br /&gt;

    Soft light usually has decent shadow detail. This is due  to the 
fact that soft light has a smaller dynamic range than hard light. Under 
 soft light conditions, a photographer has a good chance of capturing 
the entire  dynamic range of the scene.&lt;br /&gt;

    In addition to the gentile blending of light and shadow  and more
 manageable dynamic range, soft light usually produces more saturated  
colors than hard light.&lt;br /&gt;

  Soft light is created  by a large or filtered light source. A hazy or 
cloudy sky will produce soft  light. This is one of the reasons that 
cloudy or even rainy days are good for  flower photography. Light 
reflected off of a surface (e.g., a white reflector) often  becomes 
soft. Light that is filtered by a lot of atmosphere is soft. &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 8: Flower Shot in Soft Light&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="267" id="Placeholder8" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-1/flowers-1-8.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Figure 8 shows a flower that was photographed in soft  light. It can be seen that the tonal transitions are gentle and pleasing.&lt;br /&gt;

    Hard light is a very direct, harsh, and often  unflattering 
light. Hard light has a very high contrast, and the transitions  between
 light and shadow are usually rather abrupt.&lt;br /&gt;

    Hard light often lacks shadow detail. This lack of  shadow detail
 is related to the large dynamic range of hard light. In hard  light 
conditions, either the highlights or shadows may lose detail when  
photographed.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 9:&amp;nbsp; Flower Shot in Hard  Light&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="267" id="Placeholder9" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-1/flowers-1-9.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Hard light generally creates a stark or severe feeling.  This can
 work to the detriment of the flower photographer. A beautiful flower  
shot in hard light conditions will, likely, not look very attractive. 
Part of  this is due to the harsh contrast. Another factor is  that hard
 light  tends to desaturate colors. So, a flower shot in hard light will
 have washed out  colors. This is demonstrated in Figure 9 that shows a 
flower shot in hard  light. As can be seen, the shadows are harsh and 
the color desaturated.&lt;br /&gt;

    By now, it should be obvious that soft light is highly desirable  for most flower photography.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_break"&gt;

    &lt;span class="bold"&gt;Color:&lt;/span&gt; Visible  light is composed of a 
mixture of colors. Neutral light is composed of an equal amount of each 
of these colors. However, light is not always neutral. Often, the color 
 balance of the light has been altered. Most frequently, this occurs 
because one  or more of the colors have been, at least partially, 
filtered out of the light.  When this happens, the color of the light 
changes. Because of this, the light  is constantly changing color all 
day long, and this affects the color balance  of images that are taken.&lt;br /&gt;

    This is an issue because color affects the mood of an  image. 
Consequently, the color of the light that illuminates a scene will  
impact the mood of the image and its ability to impart what the 
photographer  wanted to communicate to the viewer of the image. This 
works to great  advantage for the knowledgeable photographer that uses 
knowledge of light color  to capture images where the color of the light
 is in harmony with the mood that  the photographer wishes to create in 
the image. Conversely, the light often  works to the detriment of the 
less knowledgeable photographer to contradict the  mood that was 
intended.&lt;br /&gt;

    Luckily, the color of light can be simplified down to three  
basic categories of color: neutral light (no strong hue), warm light 
(tinted  with yellow, orange, and red), and cool light (tinted with 
blue). We can  simplify color down to these three categories because 
each of these categories  has a different effect on how people respond 
to an image.&lt;br /&gt;

    Neutral light, which has no strong hue, is best used when  a 
photographer wants the natural color of the objects to shine forth. 
Neutral light is found away from both ends of the day  (neither in very 
early morning nor in late afternoon). Light from a direct, overhead  sun
 on a clear day may have a fairly neutral color.&lt;br /&gt;

    Photographers that wish to  use neutral light need to beware of 
certain conditions. Heavy cloud cover will  likely shift the color of 
the light toward blue. Also, shadows generally have a  bluish hue. Light
 that is filtered or reflected in any way may pick up a hue.  For 
instance, a photographer standing in a forest will, likely, find that 
the  light has picked up a green hue from the leaves overhead. A 
photographer in a  canyon with light reflected off the canyon walls will
 likely find that the  light has picked up a color from the walls 
(probably a warm tone).&lt;br /&gt;

    Warm light is good for creating inviting, dreamy moods in  an 
image. People tend to associate warm light with feelings of comfort,  
friendship, and romance. Warm light is best found just after sunrise or 
just  before sunset.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;

    Cool  light is good for creating feelings of calm or  cold. 
People tend to think of deep, calm lakes as being blue. A calm sky is  
usually blue. On the other hand, people also associate blue with cold:  
ice may have a blue hue as does the light of an early, winter morning.&lt;br /&gt;

    Cool light can often be found in the time between the  first 
light of day and sunrise as well as between sunset and darkness. These  
twilight times often cast a soft, dim, bluish light over the terrain. 
Blue  light can also be found under cloudy skies and in shadows.&lt;br /&gt;

    For the photographer, the issue becomes one of matching  the 
color of the light to the mood that the photographer wishes to create.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 10: Saturated Colors&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="267" id="Placeholder10" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-1/flowers-1-10.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class="bold"&gt;Saturation:&lt;/span&gt; The  next aspect of color 
that is important to the photographer is saturation. From  the 
photographer's point of view, saturation refers to the intensity of the 
 color. A color that is very vivid is a saturated color (see Figure 10).&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 11: Unsaturated Colors&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="267" id="Placeholder11" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-1/flowers-1-11.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Colors that appear dull or washed out are unsaturated  colors 
(see Figure 11). From a technical viewpoint, saturation refers to how  
much white light is mixed in with the color. Saturated colors contain 
very  little white light. That is why they are very vivid. Unsaturated 
colors  have been diluted by the addition of white light.&lt;br /&gt;

    Since color affects the mood and impact of an image,  saturation 
becomes important. Often, photographers want rich, saturated colors.  
Therefore, photographers need to understand what factors can be used to 
control  saturation.&lt;br /&gt;

    One of the biggest factors that affects saturation is  the time 
of day. Early morning and late afternoon generally provide more 
saturated  colors than mid-day.&lt;br /&gt;

    A polarizer filter is another way that can be used, in  many 
situations, to increase the saturation of colors. Part of the light that
  dilutes saturation is polarized light. A polarizer can reduce the 
amount of  polarized light and improve the saturation of the colors. 
However, a polarizer  is not equally effective under all circumstances. A
 polarizer has the greatest  affect when the camera is pointed at right 
angles (perpendicular) to the  direction of the sunlight.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_break"&gt;

    &lt;span class="bold"&gt;Direction: &lt;/span&gt;The  last characteristic of 
light is direction. Specifically, it is the direction of  the light with
 respect to the direction of the line from the camera to the  object 
being photographed. There are three primary directions of light: front, 
 side,  and back. Each of these directions of light has its own 
characteristics  and has an impact on the mood that an image projects.&lt;br /&gt;

    Frontlight hits images head on (from the front or  overhead). It 
is less used in good flower photography and more frequently used  in 
bad. Frontlighting is often found mid day. At that time, the sun is   
overhead and tends to hit objects in a rather direct manner.&lt;br /&gt;

    Sidelight is low angle light that hits objects from the  side. It can be a very dramatic light.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;

    Sidelight is great for those times when a photographer  wants to 
emphasize texture or shape. Sidelight also has an interesting affect  on
 shadows; it causes the shadows to become very long. In some cases, 
these  elongated shadows can be used to add drama or emphasize a 
flower's shape. In other  cases, the shadows themselves become the 
center of interest.&lt;br /&gt;

    Sidelight occurs when the sun is low on the horizon. This  means 
that photographers can take advantage of sidelight early in the morning 
 or late in the afternoon. Figure 12 shows an example of sidelight.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 12: Sidelight&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img height="233" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-1/flowers-1-12.jpg" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Backlight hits objects from behind so that the light is  shining toward the camera lens. &lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_break"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 13: Backlighting&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="267" id="Placeholder13" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-1/flowers-1-13.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Figure 13 shows an example of a backlit image. In this  case, the
 photographer chose an object of interest that was translucent. Part  of
 the light was able to penetrate the leaf. This produced a leaf that 
seems to  glow from within. This light accentuated both the veins of the
 leaf and the  contrasting colors.&lt;br /&gt;

    Backlighting is great for creating images with a touch of  the 
dramatic. In the case of silhouettes, form often takes on more 
importance  than detail. &lt;br /&gt;

    Like sidelight, backlight usually occurs when the sun is  low on 
the horizon, but backlight has the additional restriction that the  
light must be shining toward the camera. This can cause a couple of 
problems  for photographers. First, light shining into the lens can 
create flair. This  occurs when some of the light bounces around between
 the lens or filter  elements. If the camera has a filter on it, 
removing the filter may reduce the  flair. Second, the large dynamic 
range of backlit scenes may prevent the  photographer from capturing 
detail in parts of the scene where detail is  desired. In this case, the
 photographer may resort to one of the many methods  used to handle 
large dynamic ranges (e.g., fill flash or digital blending of  images 
taken at different exposures).&lt;br /&gt;

    Okay, so how can all this information about light be put  
together? Probably, the best way is to look at some different types of 
light&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="bold"&gt;Overcast  Light:&lt;/span&gt; Overcast light is great for flower photography.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Quality: The light is very soft.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Color: The light will tend to be blue. This is great when 
photographing bluish flowers. It is a problem when photographing warm 
toned flowers. When shooting warm toned flowers in overcast light, a 
white balance preset or manual white balance will need to be used in 
order to prevent a bluish color cast in the image.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Saturation: The saturation should be excellent.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Direction: The light seems to come from everywhere, so there is no real directionality.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;

    &lt;span class="bold"&gt;Just after Sunrise or Just before Sunset:&lt;/span&gt; This light often tends to be very good for warm toned flowers.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Quality: The light is very soft.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Color: The light will tend to be warm toned. This is great 
when photographing warm toned flowers. It is a problem when 
photographing cool toned flowers. When shooting cool toned flowers at 
this time, a white balance preset or manual white balance will need to 
be used in order to prevent a warm color cast in the image.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Saturation: The saturation should be excellent.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Direction: The light will cast gentle shadows that emphasis texture.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;span class="bold"&gt;Mid-Day, Direct Light:&lt;/span&gt; This light is horrible for flower photography. This light should be used only if a diffuser is being used to soften the light.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Quality: The light is very hard.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Color: The color of the light can vary from neutral to somewhat blue.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Saturation: Very poor saturation.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Direction: The direction varies from overhead to off to an  angle. In any case, texture is minimized with this light.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
In summary, the best light for flower photography occurs  in overcast conditions, just after sunrise, or just before sunset.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3 align="center"&gt;
White  Balance&lt;/h3&gt;
Photography is basically painting with light. The film or  sensor
 is the canvas, the camera is the brush, and light is the paint. 
However,  as covered above, the light that a photographer paints with 
often has a color  to it. Film and sensor capture this color which then 
affects the quality and  mood of the image.&lt;br /&gt;

    To create an image that accurately depicts what a  photographer 
intended, the photographer must be aware of the color of light and  must
 make adjustments when necessary. The subject of the color of light, and
  the techniques of dealing with it, are referred to as white balance.&lt;br /&gt;

    To manage the color of light, photographers have three  options:&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Auto white balance&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Preset white balance&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Custom/manual white balance&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
With auto white balance, the camera attempts to determine the 
color of the light and automatically adjust for that color. Many people 
just leave the camera set to auto white balance all the time. This is 
certainly the easiest option. Auto white balance works reasonably well 
under the following conditions:&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;The application does not require absolute maximum color accuracy&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;There is not a preponderance of one color in the scene being photographed&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;The photographer wants adjustments made for the color temperature of the light&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
Unfortunately, auto white balance is a very poor choice  for 
flower photography. One of the main reasons that photographers 
photograph  flowers is to capture the beautiful colors. So, the last 
thing that a flower  photographer wants is poor color accuracy. 
Furthermore, flower images generally  have a strong preponderance of one
 or two colors. This will tend to exacerbate  the problem and cause 
further color accuracy problems. Last, if a photographer  is shooting 
just after sunrise or before sunset, auto white balance will tend  to 
remove the warm tones of the light. This will desaturate warm toned 
flowers.&lt;br /&gt;

    With preset white balance, the color temperature is  assigned by a
 photographer, prior to a shot being taken, by selecting one of  the 
preset white balance options. Many cameras have multiple preset white  
balance options. For instance, a camera may have settings for bright 
sunny  outdoors, cloudy outdoors, shady outdoors, tungsten, fluorescent,
 and flash. Preset  white balance works well when:&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;The application does not require absolute maximum color accuracy&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;The light source matches one of the preset white balance options&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;

    One advantage of preset white balance is that it is  not fooled 
if there is a lot of one color in the scene. So, an orange poppy  will 
not cause problems with the white balance when the proper preset is 
used. However,  using a preset white balance is not the most accurate 
method of handling white  balance. This is because the light might not 
perfectly match the preset. In  other words, the light of a sunny day 
might not perfectly match the  color of the sunny outdoors preset on the
 camera.&lt;br /&gt;

    Rather than make assumptions about the color temperature  of 
light (auto white balance) or fixing the color temperature at a given 
value  (preset white balance), custom white balance actually uses the 
camera to  measure the color of the light hitting the sensor. To measure
 the color of the light, a photographer must use a neutral gray  or 
white object to establish the white balance. Typically, a photographer 
will  photograph a gray card, or similar object, and use that to 
establish the  white balance.&lt;br /&gt;

    The advantage of the custom white balance is that it  accurately 
records the color of objects as they would appear if the objects  were 
photographed in neutral light. Furthermore, custom white balance  sets 
the white balance much more accurately than either the auto white 
balance  or the preset white balances. Therefore, custom white balance 
is the best  option when:&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Maximum color accuracy is required&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;The photographer wants the colors in the image to appear as they would under neutral light&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
It was just mentioned that one of the advantages of  custom white
 balance is that it accurately records the color of objects as they  
would appear if the objects were photographed in neutral light. On the 
other  hand, this is also one of the disadvantages of custom white 
balance. In other words, accurate color according to how  the colors 
would appear in neutral light can be either a good or a bad thing.  For 
instance, custom white balance is generally the best choice when 
photographing warm toned flowers in overcast light as the custom white 
balance will remove the blue cast of the light. However,  when 
photographing warm toned flowers just after sunrise or before sunset the
  warm tone of the light greatly enhances the color of the flowers. In 
this case,  a custom white balance should not be used as it will 
desaturate the warm toned flowers.  A better choice would be to use a 
daylight preset white balance.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new"&gt;

    &lt;h3 align="center"&gt;
Exposure&lt;/h3&gt;
There are many ways to determine proper exposure.  However, it is
 beyond the scope of this article to cover the various methods. On  the 
other hand, it is worth mentioning that flowers can often fool a 
camera’s  exposure meter. For instance, a white flower can fool the 
camera into thinking that  there is more light than there really is -- 
resulting in an underexposed image.  Thus, whatever method is used to 
determine the exposure, a test shot should be  taken and the histogram 
on the camera screen checked to ensure that the  exposure was really 
accurate.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3 align="center"&gt;
Wind&lt;/h3&gt;
Wind is a perpetual problem for flower photography.  Nevertheless, there are ways to minimize the wind’s affect.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;The wind is generally calmer in the early morning. Thus, early
 morning shoots will tend to produce less wind problems than later in 
the day.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;The ISO can be increased or a wider aperture used in order to allow a faster shutter speed.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;An obstacle, such as a camera bag, can be placed such that it blocks the wind.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;The stem of the flower can be tied or gently fixed to something stationary.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Simply wait for a break in the wind; then, take the shot. 
Repeat this procedure many times. One of the advantages of digital 
photography is that there is no cost for taking lots of images. If many 
images are taken, at least one of them is bound to be sharp.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</description><thr:total xmlns:thr="http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0">0</thr:total><author>naswarman.com.pk@gmail.com (A A)</author></item><item><title>How to Photograph Flowers -- Part</title><link>http://about-digital-photography-0.blogspot.com/2011/11/how-to-photograph-flowers-part.html</link><pubDate>Tue, 15 Nov 2011 03:19:00 -0800</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-2842667588749990803.post-632233140137225534</guid><description>&lt;div dir="ltr" style="text-align: left;" trbidi="on"&gt;
&lt;div class="text_block"&gt;
&lt;h1&gt;

How to Photograph Flowers -- Part II&lt;/h1&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;

Article and Photography by Ron Bigelow&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;

www.ronbigelow.com&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new"&gt;
Now that the technical aspects of flower photography have  been mastered, it is time to delve into the artistic side.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;
&lt;h3 align="center"&gt;

Pristine  with Character&lt;/h3&gt;
Suppose that a chef wanted to create a great meal for a  special 
guest. How successful would he be if he started out with poor  
ingredients? If his vegetables were not fresh and the bread was moldy, 
it would be  pretty much impossible to create an enticing gourmet meal. 
For a great meal, it  is imperative that the chef start with the proper 
components.&lt;br /&gt;
It is no different with flower photography. In order to create 
great flower images, one must start with the proper components. In this 
case, the proper components are the flowers. However, not just any 
flower will do. The flowers must meet two criteria. The first criterion 
is that the flowers must be in pristine condition. This means that the 
flowers must be physically perfect. Flowers that are not perfectly 
fresh, have marks, or have been partially eaten by bugs should not be 
used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rs_1"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rs_2"&gt;
Figure 1: Flower not in Pristine Condition&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="400" id="Placeholder" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-2/flowers-2-1.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="272" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Figure 1 illustrates this point. At first, this flower might seem
 like a good choice for a flower image. Nonetheless, a closer 
examination of the flower shows the flower has aged. The tip of the top 
pedal has started to dry up.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 2: Close-up of Dried Up Portion of Flower&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="267" id="Placeholder2" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-2/flowers-2-2.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
This can be seen in the close-up crop in Figure 2. Thus, this flower is not acceptable for flower photography&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_break"&gt;
Having a pristine flower is a start, but it is not enough, by 
itself, to guarantee a great flower image. Thus, the second criterion is
 that the flower must have character. Now, character is a bit hard to 
define. Perhaps, the best way to describe character is that it is 
something that grabs one’s attention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rs_1"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rs_2"&gt;
Figure 3: Flower with no Character&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="400" id="Placeholder3" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-2/flowers-2-3.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="267" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Figures 3 and 4 demonstrate this concept. Figure 3 shows a 
flower. Now, the flower might be nice to look at, but it is kind of 
ordinary. There is nothing about this flower that particularly grabs 
one’s attention.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ls_1"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ls_2"&gt;
Figure 4: Flower with Character&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="400" id="Placeholder4" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-2/flowers-2-4.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="267" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Figure 4 also shows a flower. However, this flower has some 
character. It is much more likely to grab a person’s attention than the 
previous flower. Thus, this flower would make a much better subject for a
 flower image.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;
&lt;h3&gt;

Center of Interest&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 5: Center of Interest&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="266" id="Placeholder5" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-2/flowers-2-5.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Most good flower images have a strong center of interest (COI). 
The COI is the thing that grabs the attention of the viewer. This can be
 seen in Figure 5. The bug on the flower clearly demands the viewer’s 
attention. Clearly, the bug is the COI in this image.&lt;br /&gt;
This image also demonstrates a couple of important points  about 
the COI. First, the COI is the object around which the rest of the image
 revolves.  What this means is that the purpose of the rest of the image
 is to support and  enhance the COI. This is clearly seen in Figure 5. 
The yellow  color of the flower strongly contrasts with the green color 
of the insect which  helps the insect to stand out. In addition, the 
center of the flower provides a  simple pattern that contrasts with the 
lines of the insect which further makes  the insect prominent in the 
image. Clearly, the rest of the image serves to bring attention  to the 
insect and make if the most important part of the image.&lt;br /&gt;
The second point is that the viewer’s attention is  constantly 
drawn back to the COI. As one views Figure 5, one will usually first  
notice the insect. After viewing the insect, the viewer’s eye will tend 
to  examine the rest of the flower. However, the viewer’s eye will 
repeatedly  return to the insect. This shows that the COI not only grabs
 the viewer’s  attention, it also serves as a comfortable resting place 
for the viewer’s  attention. This is a very important point because, 
without a strong COI, the  viewer’s attention randomly roams around the 
image looking for something of  interest; finding nothing, the viewer 
quickly looses interest in the image.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 6: Subtle Center of Interest&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="267" id="Placeholder6" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-2/flowers-2-6.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Sometimes, the COI is fairly obvious such as with the  insect in 
Figure 5. However, at other times, the COI can be more subtle. This is  
show in Figure 6.&lt;br /&gt;
At first, one might think that there is no COI in this  image. 
However, after viewing the image for a little while, it becomes obvious 
 that the viewer’s attention keeps coming back to the graceful curve of 
the  pedal that works its way to the top of the image. Furthermore, the 
rest of the  image supports this curve. The portion of the image 
directly behind the curved  pedal provides a dark blue contrast to the 
light tone of the curved pedal. The  bright yellow on the lower pedal 
serves as a leading line that leads the eye  into the curved pedal. It 
becomes obvious that the curved pedal is the COI of  this image. 
Consequently, while the COI of this image may be more subtle, the  image
 still has a good COI.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;
&lt;h3 align="center"&gt;

Composition&lt;/h3&gt;
Composition consists of how the objects in an image are  arranged
 with respect to each other. Now, there are many components of  
composition. A comprehensive coverage of the components of composition 
is  beyond the scope of this article series. However, two basic aspects 
of composition will be covered:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Rule of thirds&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Golden triangle&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rs_1"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rs_2"&gt;
Figure 7: Rule of Thirds&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="400" id="Placeholder7" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-2/flowers-2-7.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="267" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
The rule of thirds states that an image should be divided  into 
thirds both vertically and horizontally. The COI should be placed at one
 of the  intersections of  the dividing lines. Figure 7 demonstrates 
application of the  rule of thirds. The COI, the flower, is placed at 
the intersection of the red,  dividing lines.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 8: Golden Triangle&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="266" id="Placeholder8" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-2/flowers-2-8.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
An alternative approach is the golden triangle. Figure 8 
demonstrates the golden triangle. When  using the golden triangle, a 
diagonal is drawn from one corner of the image to the  opposing corner. 
Then, lines are drawn from the other two corners such that  they 
intersect perpendicularly with the first diagonal. The COI is placed 
near one  of the intersections of these lines.&lt;br /&gt;
Application of the rule of thirds or golden triangle helps  make 
an image more dynamic and balanced. In fact, research has shown that 
people’s eyes tend to gravitate  to the areas of an image located at the
 intersections of the dividing lines of  the rule of thirds and golden 
triangle. In contrast, placing the COI at the  dead center of the image 
can make the image have a very static feel. Placing  the image at other 
locations can often make the image appear unbalanced.&lt;br /&gt;
That said, these rules are not absolutes. There are times  when 
the rules should be broken. However, when the rules are broken, it 
should  be because breaking the rules strengthens the image.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new"&gt;
&lt;h3 align="center"&gt;

SGD&lt;/h3&gt;
Each person has her own style when shooting flowers. I  have 
developed a style that I call SGD: simple, graceful, and dynamic. These 
 are essentially the goals for which I strive when setting up a flower 
shot. These  goals are defined as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Simple: To create a simple composition that directs the 
attention to the COI and eliminates all distracting detail that does not
 support the COI.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Graceful: To use compositional elements that emphasize the grace or elegance of the flower.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Dynamic: To use compositional elements that strongly attract and hold the attention of the viewer.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
Each of these three goals is addressed by specific techniques.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next_break"&gt;
&lt;h3&gt;

Simple&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;span class="bold"&gt;Simple Definition:&lt;/span&gt; To create a simple 
composition that directs the attention to the COI and eliminates all 
distracting detail that does not support the COI.&lt;br /&gt;
The simple goal is addressed with five techniques:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Subtraction&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Move in close&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Selective focus&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Blurred background&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Contrasting background&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;span class="bold"&gt;Subtraction:&lt;/span&gt;  Perhaps, the best way to 
describe subtraction is by a story about Michelangelo.  Supposedly, when
 Michelangelo was asked how he had made the magnificent statue  of 
David, he replied, “I just removed everything that wasn’t David”.&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, when applied to flower photography, the art of  
subtraction involves removing everything that does not support the COI. 
Why is  this so important? Any element of a flower image that does not 
support the COI  will distract the viewer’s attention from the COI to 
weaker elements of the image  or may even lead the viewer’s eye out of 
the image entirely. This results in a  weak image and is obviously 
undesirable.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 9: Distracting Detail&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="267" id="Placeholder9" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-2/flowers-2-9.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
This concept is shown in Figures 9 and 10. Figure 9 shows  a 
field of wildflowers. While the wildflowers are beautiful, there is a 
lot of  distracting detail: mountains, a dead tree, and bushes. The 
viewer’s eye has a  hard time determining what is of importance.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 10: Simple&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="266" id="Placeholder10" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-2/flowers-2-10.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Figure 10 shows the same field of flowers except the  simple 
concept was applied. A COI was identified, the white flower. Then,  
everything that did not support the COI was eliminated. The only things 
that  were left are the other flowers that provide a contrast for the 
white flower  and make it stand out. &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_break"&gt;
&lt;span class="bold"&gt;Move  in Close:&lt;/span&gt; Moving in close helps 
to make the COI larger and more  dominant, and it also removes 
unnecessary detail along the edges of the image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rs_1"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rs_2"&gt;
Figure 11: Moving in Close&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="400" id="Placeholder11" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-2/flowers-2-11.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="267" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Figure 11 shows this concept applied to a rose. The COI  of this 
image is the center of the rose. By moving in close, the center of the  
rose is much bigger and more dominant than would have been the case if 
the  camera had been farther away. The only details that are left are 
the curves of  the petals that provide a shape contrast to the diagonal 
lines of the center.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;
&lt;span class="bold"&gt;Selective  Focus:&lt;/span&gt; Selective focus uses a
 very narrow depth of field such that  the COI is in focus, but 
everything else is out of focus. The result is that  the viewer’s eye is
 naturally directed to the COI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 12: Selective Focus&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="267" id="Placeholder12" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-2/flowers-2-12.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Figure 12 shows the selective focus concept. A very  narrow depth
 of field was used so that everything but the tip of the leaf was  left 
out of focus. This removed any distracting detail and draws the viewer’s
  attention directly to the tip of the leaf.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section"&gt;
&lt;span class="bold"&gt;Blurred  Background:&lt;/span&gt; This technique is 
similar to selective  focus. The difference is that only the background 
is blurred with this  technique. Once the background is blurred, any 
background detail is eliminated. Then, the COI naturally stands out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rs_1"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rs_2"&gt;
Figure 13: Blurred Background&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="400" id="Placeholder13" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-2/flowers-2-13.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="267" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Figure 13 shows an application of a blurred background. As  can 
be seen, the entire flower is in focus, but the background is not.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_break"&gt;
&lt;span class="bold"&gt;Contrasting  Background:&lt;/span&gt; The 
contrasting background technique  minimizes the background detail and 
strengthens the COI by utilizing a background that contrasts with  the 
flower. The contrast can be of tone, color, or pattern.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 14: Contrasting Background&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="267" id="Placeholder14" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-2/flowers-2-14.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Figure 14 shows a flower image with a contrasting  background. 
With this image, the contrast is one of tone. The dark background  
really makes the flower stand out.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;
&lt;h3 align="center"&gt;

Graceful&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;span class="bold"&gt;Graceful  Definition:&lt;/span&gt; To use compositional elements that emphasize the grace or elegance of the flower.&lt;br /&gt;
The nature of flowers is one of grace and beauty. Much of  this 
comes from the lines and curves of the flowers. So, the intent here is 
to  use the lines and curves of the flowers to help communicate that 
grace to the  viewer of an image.&lt;br /&gt;
The graceful goal is addressed with two techniques:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Leading lines&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Curves&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;span class="bold"&gt;Leading  Lines:&lt;/span&gt; This is a very powerful
 technique. Leading  lines actually do two things simultaneously. They 
strongly direct the viewer’s  eye to the COI, and they emphasis the 
graceful nature of the flower in an  image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 15: Leading Lines&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="267" id="Placeholder15" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-2/flowers-2-15.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Figure 15 shows an image that uses leading lines. This  image 
actually has two different sets of leading lines. First, the dominant  
leading lines are the bright yellow lines that lead directly to the COI 
at the  center of the flower. The second set of leading lines is formed 
by the edges  of the flower petals that also lead to the COI.&lt;br /&gt;
These leading lines function as mentioned. They lead the  
viewer’s eye to the COI, and they also exhibit the graceful nature of 
this  flower.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;
&lt;span class="bold"&gt;Curves:&lt;/span&gt; Curves  sole function is to display the graceful nature of flowers. They do not point  to the COI like leading lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 16: Curves&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="267" id="Placeholder16" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-2/flowers-2-16.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Figure 16 illustrates the use of curves. There are  several green
 curves receding into the background. These curves display the  elegant 
shape of the leaves, but they do not lead to any specific point in the  
image.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;
&lt;h3 align="center"&gt;

Dynamic&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;span class="bold"&gt;Dynamic  Definition:&lt;/span&gt; To use compositional elements that strongly  attract and hold the attention of the viewer.&lt;br /&gt;
The dynamic goal is addressed with three techniques:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Saturated colors&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Contrasting colors&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Contrasting lines&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;span class="bold"&gt;Saturated  Colors:&lt;/span&gt; Color is probably 
the strongest reason that people are  attracted to flowers. The more 
saturated the color, the more dynamic the  flowers appear to us and the 
more we are drawn to the flowers. So, it is not  surprising that using 
saturated colors would be a technique that increases the  dynamic nature
 of flower images.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rs_1"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rs_2"&gt;
Figure 17: Saturated Colors&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="400" id="Placeholder17" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-2/flowers-2-17.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="267" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Figure 17 shows an image that derives its dynamic nature from the use of  saturated color.&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, the question of how to capture saturated  colors now 
becomes very important. There are two primary answers to this  question.
 First, the right flower must be found. Second, the flower must be  shot
 in the correct light.&lt;br /&gt;
This flower was shot during a  break in a rainstorm.  As covered 
in the section on light in Part I of this series, overcast skies  
enhance color saturation .Thus, the heavily overcast sky enhanced the 
colors of  this flower and made the image possible. Had this flower been
 shot in bright  sunlight, the image would not have been very 
successful.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;
&lt;span class="bold"&gt;Contrasting  Colors:&lt;/span&gt; Our attention is 
strongly drawn to color contrast.  Furthermore, this is not just a 
psychological phenomenon. It is actually build  into our 
sensory/perceptual systems. In other words, from a nervous system point 
 of view, we are hard wired to respond to color contrast. As 
photographers, we  can use this to our advantage by seeking out subjects
 of high color contrast  and photographing them in such a way as to 
emphasize the color contrast.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 18: Color Contrast&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="267" id="Placeholder18" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-2/flowers-2-18.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Figure 18 depends on color contrast for much of its  impact. When
 setting up this shot, a search was performed to find a flower that  
would allow the camera to be situated such that the background was the 
solid,  luminous green of the spring vegetation. This provided the 
necessary color  contrast that makes the flower stand out from its 
background.&lt;br /&gt;
Had a different position been chosen such that the  background of
 the image was the brown rock wall from which this flower grew,  the 
image would have lost most of its impact.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_break"&gt;
&lt;span class="bold"&gt;Contrasting  Lines:&lt;/span&gt; Contrasting lines can also add a dynamic touch to a  flower image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rs_1"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rs_2"&gt;
Figure 19: Contrasting Lines&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="400" id="Placeholder19" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-2/flowers-2-19.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="267" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Figure 19 illustrates the use of contrasting lines.  Actually, 
this image uses both contrasting colors and contrasting lines. This  
serves to make the COI, the flower stalk, stand out from the  
background.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_next"&gt;
&lt;h3 align="center"&gt;

Wrapping  Up the SGD Approach&lt;/h3&gt;
Now, in demonstrating this approach, one image was shown  for 
each technique, and an explanation of how the technique improved the 
image was presented. However,  when out in the field, multiple 
techniques can be used with a single shot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 20: Multiple Techniques&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="267" id="Placeholder20" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/flowers-2/flowers-2-18.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
This can be seen in the Tiger Lilly image shown in Figure  18. 
This image is shown again in Figure 20. When first shown, this image was
 used  to show how color contrast can enhance an image. On the other 
hand, multiple  techniques were used with this image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;span class="bold"&gt;Simple:&lt;/span&gt;  Subtraction was used with this
 image to eliminate all distracting detail. Moving  in close and using a
 contrasting background were also used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;span class="bold"&gt;Graceful:&lt;/span&gt; The  stem of the flower 
serves as a powerful leading line that leads to the COI. In  addition, 
the petals serve as curves that display the graceful nature of the  
flower.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;span class="bold"&gt;Dynamic: &lt;/span&gt;In  addition to contrasting colors, saturated colors were used.&lt;br /&gt;
In short, this image used most of the techniques  presented in 
this article. In general, the more techniques that are used with  an 
image, the more likely that the image will be successful.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</description><thr:total xmlns:thr="http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0">0</thr:total><author>naswarman.com.pk@gmail.com (A A)</author></item><item><title>Photography Ideas: Negative Space</title><link>http://about-digital-photography-0.blogspot.com/2011/11/photography-ideas-negative-space.html</link><pubDate>Tue, 15 Nov 2011 03:17:00 -0800</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-2842667588749990803.post-7972217308564333532</guid><description>&lt;div dir="ltr" style="text-align: left;" trbidi="on"&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
Photography Ideas: Negative Space&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;img alt="" class="alignright size-full wp-image-234" height="400" src="http://ronbigelow.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/negative-space.jpg" title="negative-space" width="267" /&gt;Are
 you searching for a few photography ideas for a photography project? As
 long as you will be investing some time on a photo project, why not 
pick a project that develops your photography skills. Not surprisingly, 
there are many skills from which to choose. One skill that will help you
 develop your photography abilities, negative space, is presented in 
this post.&lt;br /&gt;

Negative space is a compositional method that can be used to produce 
eye-catching photos. Therefore, let’s take a look at the technique?&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;b&gt;Using Negative Space&lt;/b&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

At a fundamental level, any image can be broken down into three components&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;b&gt;Frame:&lt;/b&gt; The border that defines the perimeters of the image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;b&gt;Positive Space:&lt;/b&gt; The positive space is the subject of the image. This is normally the item on which the camera is focused.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;b&gt;Negative Space:&lt;/b&gt; The negative space is the rest of the image. It is located between the positive space and the frame.&lt;br /&gt;

Any photograph is formed, in varying proportions, of the frame, 
positive space, and negative space. In order to create impressive 
images, it is necessary to manage these components.&lt;br /&gt;

When composing photos, some people tend to think mostly in terms of 
the positive space. Put simply, they think primarily about the main 
subject of the photo. Little thought is put into the negative space. It 
is treated almost as an unimportant part of the photo. This is not the 
best way to compose an image! This is because, if managed properly, the 
negative space can do a couple of important things.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;b&gt;First:&lt;/b&gt; The negative space can function to define the positive space.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;b&gt;Second:&lt;/b&gt; The negative space can surround the positive space in a way that can make it more conspicuous.&lt;br /&gt;

So, exactly how can the negative space help to define the positive 
space? Basically, the negative space supplies additional detail that 
improves the story of the positive space. Consider the following 
example. An image might display a blooming plant. However, we may not 
understand a lot about the plant (e.g., such as where the plant is 
located). Where is this subject located? Maybe, it is situated in a 
garden. On the other hand, maybe not. The positive space of the photo 
can only be better defined with additional details. If the photographer 
were to show some of the terrain around the positive space, this would 
create some negative space that would certainly help to much better 
define the positive space.&lt;br /&gt;

Now, there is one extremely important point that should be 
remembered. The positive space should never be overpowered by the 
negative space. For this example, the photographer might render the 
negative space somewhat out of focus so that it becomes subservient to 
the positive space.&lt;br /&gt;

The main issue to keep in mind is that the function of the negative 
space is to help support the positive space rather than to compete with 
it. This acts to strengthen the image.&lt;br /&gt;

Making the positive space stick out is the other way that the 
negative space helps to strengthen images. This is due to the fact the 
negative space can help to control the eye of a viewer. This is 
accomplished because the negative space guides the attention toward the 
positive space. Obviously, all unproductive detail must be removed from 
the negative space in order to make it effective at focusing the 
attention. Otherwise, the viewer’s attention will be on the distracting 
detail. &lt;br /&gt;

In short, both spaces need to be taken into consideration when 
figuring out how to best compose an image. In simple terms, 
photographers need to pay as much attention to the negative space as 
they do the positive space.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;b&gt;The Photography Project&lt;/b&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

So, are you geared up to create a photography project? For this 
project, you should concentrate on capturing images that have carefully 
thought out negative spaces.&lt;/div&gt;</description><thr:total xmlns:thr="http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0">0</thr:total><author>naswarman.com.pk@gmail.com (A A)</author></item><item><title>Photography Ideas: Triangles and Composition</title><link>http://about-digital-photography-0.blogspot.com/2011/11/photography-ideas-triangles-and.html</link><pubDate>Tue, 15 Nov 2011 03:16:00 -0800</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-2842667588749990803.post-3883770530715724838</guid><description>&lt;div dir="ltr" style="text-align: left;" trbidi="on"&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
Photography Ideas: Triangles and Composition&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;img alt="" class="alignright size-full wp-image-245" height="267" src="http://ronbigelow.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/photography-ideas-1-3.jpg" title="photography-ideas-1-3" width="400" /&gt;One
 great way to grow your photography proficiency is to begin a 
photography project. Most likely, you will want to choose an idea that 
can serve as the basis for the project. The use of triangles as a 
compositional technique is one idea that you may want to try.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;b&gt;Triangles and Composition&lt;/b&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

There are numerous compositional techniques that a photographer can 
select. Whenever there are numerous objects in an image, the use of 
triangles is very effective as a composition technique. The technique 
requires composing an image in such a way that three or more objects 
form a triangle.&lt;br /&gt;

Three objects are required to form the points of the triangle. The 
sides of the triangle are formed by imaginary, diagonal lines that join 
the triangle points. Whenever objects are placed in this fashion, they 
create a very dynamic composition. A viewer’s attention will tend to 
journey back and forth over the diagonal lines from one triangle point 
to another. If there are more than three objects in the image, the 
additional objects will need to lie along the diagonal lines.&lt;br /&gt;

There are a couple of ways that triangles can be used: single center of interest and multiple centers of interest.&lt;br /&gt;

Many successful photographs have a single center of interest. In 
cases like this, one of the objects that resides at a point on the 
triangle will function as the center of interest. Of course, the other 
points on the triangle likewise have a function. They serve to 
strengthen the center of interest. Now, it is crucial that the other 
objects be subservient to the center of interest. This can be done in 
many ways. For example, these objects may have a decreased sharpness, 
saturation, or contrast.&lt;br /&gt;

Obviously, there are occasions when there are several objects in an 
image, and all of the objects are equally important. This is frequently 
the situation in group portraits.&lt;br /&gt;

In the case where there are multiple objects of equal importance, the
 result is that there are actually multiple centers of interest. When an
 image is composed with multiple centers of interest, it is important to
 set up the image to ensure that all the objects have an equal weight or
 presence in the image. Another way to say this is that no single object
 should be allowed to dominate the image. This approach is often 
utilized by photographers that take group portraits. The photographer 
arranges the heads of the group members in a triangle. Now, each of the 
group members is of equal importance. So, each individual should be 
given equal weight in the image.&lt;br /&gt;

Triangles have another function. They serve to set the mood in an 
image. Triangles with the base towards the bottom and the apex at the 
top are inclined to produce a feeling of stability. A more dynamic image
 results when the base is placed across the top or side of an image.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;b&gt;Launching Your Photography Project&lt;/b&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

The purpose of this project is to make a portfolio of photos which 
use triangles for the composition. You might want to create a portfolio 
composed of images of different subject matter such as buildings, 
landscapes, and people.&lt;/div&gt;</description><thr:total xmlns:thr="http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0">0</thr:total><author>naswarman.com.pk@gmail.com (A A)</author></item><item><title>Photography ideas: Center of Interest</title><link>http://about-digital-photography-0.blogspot.com/2011/11/photography-ideas-center-of-interest.html</link><pubDate>Tue, 15 Nov 2011 03:16:00 -0800</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-2842667588749990803.post-3421368620865351291</guid><description>&lt;div dir="ltr" style="text-align: left;" trbidi="on"&gt;
&lt;div class="post" id="post-259"&gt;

    
  &lt;h2&gt;
Photography ideas: Center of Interest&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;div class="entry"&gt;

    &lt;img alt="" class="alignright size-full wp-image-261" height="255" src="http://ronbigelow.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/Center-of-Interest.jpg" title="Center of Interest" width="384" /&gt;As
 photographers, we all like to create images that grab people’s 
attention. The question becomes, “What are the characteristics of these 
types of images?” Once we know these characteristics, we can use them to
 capture strong images.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;b&gt;Emotion&lt;/b&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

One of the most important characteristics of strong images is that 
they communicate an emotion to the viewer. For example, the image of a 
firefighter saving the life of a young child, an image of a beautiful 
sunset over a tropical island, and an image of a war torn village all 
communicate strong emotion that rivets our attention on the image.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;b&gt;Communicate&lt;/b&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

That being the case, the next question becomes, “How can we 
communicate emotion in an image?” Well, one of the best ways to 
communicate emotion is to create an image that has a strong center of 
interest. The center of interest is the most important object in an 
image. It is the object that, when properly composed, draws the 
attention of viewers.&lt;br /&gt;

Being the most important part of an image, the main role of the 
center of interest is to communicate the emotion in an image. Thus, the 
stronger the center of interest, the stronger the emotion and the image 
will be.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;b&gt;Creating Strength&lt;/b&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

So, the last question becomes, “How can we create a strong center of 
interest?” Five of the best ways to do this are: identifying emotion, 
single center, brightness, color, and contrast.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;u&gt;Identifying Emotion:&lt;/u&gt; Of course, the most important thing is 
that the center of interest must personify the emotion that the image is
 to communicate. As an example, if it is desired to communicate the 
emotion of the love of a parent for a young child, the center of 
interest could be a mother tightly holding an infant. In other words, 
you must first identify the emotion that you wish to communicate. Then, 
you must find a scene, object, or person that personifies that emotion 
and make it the center of interest.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;u&gt;Single Center:&lt;/u&gt; For most images, it is generally best to have 
only a single center of interest. This helps to focus a viewer’s 
attention. If there is more than one center of interest, the viewer’s 
attention is split. In many cases, this can weaken an image.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;u&gt;Brightness:&lt;/u&gt; Great, you now have a single center of interest 
that personifies an emotion. The important thing now is to make it stand
 out. An excellent way to do this is by managing the brightness in an 
image. The eyes are drawn to the brightest part of an image. By making 
the center of interest the brightest spot in an image, it will naturally
 draw and hold a viewer’s attention. As an example, the mother and 
infant previously mentioned could be well lit, but the rest of the image
 could quickly fall into shadow.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;u&gt;Color:&lt;/u&gt; Another way to make the center of interest stand out is
 to make sure that it contains saturated color. Since saturated color 
naturally draws the attention of viewers, saturated color can strengthen
 a center of interest. Another way this can be done is to create a 
center of interest composed primarily of one color, and surround it with
 a background of a contrasting color.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;u&gt;Contrast:&lt;/u&gt; Like brightness and color, contrast also captures 
the attention of viewers. With this approach, the center of interest 
should be high contrast. The rest of the image should be moderate to low
 contrast. With this method, viewers will naturally be drawn to the high
 contrast center of interest.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;b&gt;Photography Project&lt;/b&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

So, why not start a project centered on creating images with strong 
centers of interest. The goal of this project would be to create images 
where each image has a single center of interest that communicates an 
emotion. Then, use brightness, color, and contrast to strengthen the 
image.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;b&gt;Summary&lt;/b&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like to check out several additional photography ideas, just click &lt;a href="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/photography-ideas/photography-ideas.html"&gt;Creative Photography Ideas&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

    
    
  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="postmetadata"&gt;

  
   Filed  in: &lt;a href="http://ronbigelow.com/blog/category/types-of-photography/" rel="category tag" title="View all posts in Types of Photography"&gt;Types of Photography&lt;/a&gt; | &lt;a href="http://ronbigelow.com/blog/author/rbigelow/" title="Posts by rbigelow"&gt;rbigelow&lt;/a&gt; | July 26, 2010 | &lt;a href="http://ronbigelow.com/blog/types-of-photography/photography-ideas-center-of-interest/#comments" title="Comment on Photography ideas: Center of Interest"&gt;Comments (16)&lt;/a&gt; &lt;br /&gt;

       
   &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
&lt;a href="http://ronbigelow.com/blog/types-of-photography/photography-ideas-color/" rel="bookmark" title="Permanent Link to Photography Ideas: Color"&gt;Photography Ideas: Color&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;img alt="" class="alignright size-full wp-image-251" height="267" src="http://ronbigelow.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/photography-ideas-1-1.jpg" title="photography-ideas-1-1" width="400" /&gt;Color
 is a very good place to start to improve images because color grabs 
people’s attention. For instance, a couple of the most popular 
photographic subjects are sunsets and flowers, and the primary reason 
that people like sunset and flower images is because of the color. Thus,
 the utilization of color is one of the most effective means of creating
 impact in images. However, to use color effectively, one must 
understand a little about color.&lt;br /&gt;

There are three aspects of color that can be used to create dramatic images: hue, saturation, and contrast.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;u&gt;Hue:&lt;/u&gt; Hue is what we normally think of as color (technically, hue is determined by the wavelength of the light).&lt;br /&gt;

One of the biggest reasons that hue has such a large impact on 
photography is that our visual system has different degrees of 
sensitivity to different hues. With respect to the three primary colors 
(red, green, and blue), the human visual system is most sensitive to 
red, is moderately sensitively to green, and is much less sensitive to 
blue (approximately two thirds of the eyes’ color detecting cones detect
 red, one third detect green, and only one percent detect blue). As a 
result, images with a lot of red (or related colors such as orange) tend
 to really grab people’s attention. So, one way to create eye-catching 
images is to start with subjects that contain these colors.&lt;br /&gt;

However, there is more to hue than just its affect on the human 
perceptual system. Hue also has an emotional impact. In many situations,
 the warm colors (e.g., red, orange, and yellow) bring feelings of 
comfort. The red glow of a fireplace, a gorgeous orange sunset, and a 
beautiful yellow flower are all examples of the comforting affect of the
 warm colors. However, in some instances, red can bring feelings of 
alarm or excitement (that is why stop signs, stop lights, and fire 
trucks are painted red). Green often brings feeling of newness or 
freshness (as in a lush, green, springtime meadow). Blue tends to create
 feelings of calm as in a peaceful ocean as dusk approaches.&lt;br /&gt;

So, what does this mean for a photographer? Basically, it means that 
the predominant hues in an image should be selected carefully to match 
the mood of the image. As an example, the proper use of green could 
enhance the mood of a landscape, but it might detract from the mood of a
 romantic image.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;u&gt;Saturation:&lt;/u&gt; Saturation refers to the “pureness” of a color. 
For instance, a saturated red is perceived as a very intense red while a
 less saturated red is perceived as a diluted or washed out red. 
Saturation is important because it helps determine the strength of 
response a person has to a color. Highly saturated colors create strong 
reactions in the human perceptual system while poorly saturated colors 
create a much weaker reaction. From a photographer’s perspective, this 
means that saturated colors will create a stronger reaction to our 
images.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;u&gt;Contrast:&lt;/u&gt; Color contrast refers to using two or more colors 
that are different enough that they contrast. Using color contrast is 
one of the most effective ways to create powerful images as the human 
visual system is highly stimulated by contrasting colors (in other 
words, our visual system is set up to respond to contrasting color). So,
 why not use this to create great images by looking for subjects that 
have contrasting color.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;Photography Project:&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

Your assignment is to create a portfolio of images that uses color to
 draw the attention of viewers. Use your knowledge of how hue, 
saturation, and color contrast can be used to enhance images.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;In Summary&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

If you would like to check out several additional photography ideas, just click Creative Photography Ideas.&lt;/div&gt;</description><thr:total xmlns:thr="http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0">0</thr:total><author>naswarman.com.pk@gmail.com (A A)</author></item><item><title>Infinite Depth of Field</title><link>http://about-digital-photography-0.blogspot.com/2011/11/infinite-depth-of-field.html</link><pubDate>Tue, 15 Nov 2011 03:15:00 -0800</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-2842667588749990803.post-8182625640226367840</guid><description>&lt;div dir="ltr" style="text-align: left;" trbidi="on"&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
Infinite Depth of Field&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;img alt="" class="alignright size-full wp-image-284" height="400" src="http://ronbigelow.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/dof-11.jpg" title="dof-1" width="267" /&gt;Depth
 of field (DOF) is a very important issue in photography. In many cases,
 a very large DOF is desired. For instance, this is often the case in 
landscape photography.&lt;br /&gt;

However, this immediately causes technical problems. The usual 
solution is to stop the lens down to its smallest aperture. This 
maximizes the DOF, but the small aperture also significantly degrades 
the quality of the image due to diffraction.&lt;br /&gt;

Wouldn’t it be nice if it were possible to get an extended DOF 
without any lose of image quality? Well, with a little bit of planning, 
an infinite DOF is possible. The trick here is that several shots of the
 subject are taken (preferably with the camera on a tripod). Each shot 
is focused at a different distance. That way, every point in the scene 
is in sharp focus in at least one of the images. This can all be done at
 apertures that suffer little image degradation due to diffraction (the 
middle apertures for most lenses). When using this technique, it is 
important to lock down the exposure and white balance so that they are 
the same for every shot.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt="" class="alignleft size-full wp-image-287" height="400" src="http://ronbigelow.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/dof-21.jpg" title="dof-2" width="267" /&gt;At
 first, it might appear that it would be difficult putting all those 
images together, carefully aligning the images, figuring out which image
 is sharpest for each point in the scene, and creating a final image. 
Actually, this is a very simple workflow. Photoshop will do almost all 
of the hard work.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;The Process&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

The process of combining the images in Photoshop is a six step process.&lt;br /&gt;

1. Each image is opened in Photoshop (if using a raw converter, each image must be processed in exactly the same way).&lt;br /&gt;

2. All of the images are moved into the same file. This can be done 
by dragging and dropping the images into one of the open files. The 
result is a single file with each of the images as a separate layer.&lt;br /&gt;

3. Next, it is necessary to make sure that all of the images are 
perfectly aligned. If the images were shot on a tripod, it might be 
tempting to think that the images are already aligned. However, this 
might not be the case (especially if the camera was touched for  manual 
focusing). Luckily, Photoshop can align the images. To do this, the 
layers are selected by pressing Control+Alt+a on a PC or 
Command+Option+a on a Mac. Then, the layers are aligned by choosing 
Edit/Auto-Align Layers (the Auto option is used).&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt="" class="alignright size-full wp-image-288" height="400" src="http://ronbigelow.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/dof-31.jpg" title="dof-3" width="267" /&gt;4.
 The images are now ready to be blended. In this step, Photoshop will 
analyze the layers to determine which layer is sharpest at each point in
 the image and will create masks for each layer based on the analysis. 
With the layers still selected, choose Edit/Auto-Blend Layers and choose
 Stack Images. It is also suggested that Seamless Tones and Colors be 
left unchecked. Yes, it does sound like a really good thing to check. 
However, if this box is checked, Photoshop will try to match the colors 
of the layers on an area by area basis determined by the masks that get 
created. In other words, areas that are not masked out get affected but 
the other areas are not affected. This may create localized color shifts
 that may cause color problems later. So, it is best to leave the box 
unchecked.&lt;br /&gt;

5. After the blending, there may be a bit of white along some of the 
edges that is a result of aligning the images. Consequently, the next 
step is to crop the image. This can be done by fitting the image on the 
screen by pressing Control+0 on a PC or Command+0 on a Mack, drawing a 
rectangle around the image with the Crop tool, and hitting the Enter 
key.&lt;br /&gt;

6. The last step is the cleanup. This is necessary because, while the
 Photoshop blending is pretty good, it is not perfect. There may be a 
few places where the image detail was not taken from the sharpest image.
 When this is the case, the best way to clean up any problems is to 
identify the layer with the sharpest detail in the problem area. Then, 
paint white on the mask of this layer in the problem area. It will also 
be necessary to paint black in the problem area on the masks of all of 
the higher layers. One other point is that it is usually easiest to 
determine which layer has the sharpest detail for a problem area by 
first disabling all of the layer masks. Then, the layers can be clicked 
off and on until the sharpest layer is found.&lt;br /&gt;

There are a few caveats with this technique. Obviously, the technique
 can only be used with objects that are not moving. Also, the camera 
will need to be manually focused for each of the multiple shots. The 
last caveat is that it is better to take several shots, each with the 
focus point moved only slightly from the previous shot, rather than take
 only a few shots with significantly different focus points. This will 
guarantee that there will be no out of focus points in the final image.&lt;/div&gt;</description><thr:total xmlns:thr="http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0">0</thr:total><author>naswarman.com.pk@gmail.com (A A)</author></item><item><title>Photography Ideas</title><link>http://about-digital-photography-0.blogspot.com/2011/11/photography-ideas_15.html</link><pubDate>Tue, 15 Nov 2011 03:12:00 -0800</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-2842667588749990803.post-4544828324529415386</guid><description>&lt;div dir="ltr" style="text-align: left;" trbidi="on"&gt;
&lt;div class="text_block"&gt;

    &lt;h1&gt;
Photography Ideas&lt;/h1&gt;
&lt;h1&gt;
Part 2&lt;/h1&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
Article and Photography by Ron Bigelow&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new"&gt;

    &lt;div align="left"&gt;
Part 2 of this two part series will present six more photography ideas that can be used as the basis for photography projects.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Balance&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 1: Balance&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Photography Ideas: Balance" height="267" id="Placeholder" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/photography-ideas-2/photogrpahy-ideas-2-1.jpg" style="background-color: #990099;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Often, photographers seek to create images that are balanced. In 
this sense, a balanced image is one that is harmonious. It tends to 
create a comfortable feeling. Now, there are many ways to create balance
 in an image. Three ways that we will look at are composition, color, 
and tonal contrast.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Composition:&lt;/span&gt; For balanced 
images, the goal is to create images where the images do not have any 
unusual, visual weights. In other words, no one part of an image feels 
visually heavier than any other part.&lt;br /&gt;

    There are a couple of ways to do this. One way is to create 
symmetrical images. These images look similar on the left and right 
sides (or on the top and bottom). Since the sides are so similar, they 
have equal visual weights.&lt;br /&gt;

    Another way is to follow a rule of composition such as the rule 
of thirds. Such composition rules tend to create balanced images. In 
this case, the images are not necessarily symmetrical. However, there is
 a nonsymmetrical balance. While this is not an easy term to define, 
perhaps the best way to think of it is that the image has a comfortable 
feel to it -- no one part of the image feels visually heavy.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Color:&lt;/span&gt; In a balanced image,
 the colors are harmonious. In other words, they do not clash. Colors 
that contrast strongly are to be avoided.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Tonal Contrast:&lt;/span&gt; In a 
balanced image, the contrast must be managed. That is not to say that 
there will not be any high contrast areas. There very well may be, but 
the high contrast areas will be deliberately placed to draw attention to
 the center of interest. Other high contrast areas will be avoided.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Photography Project:&lt;/span&gt; This assignment requires you to use composition, color, and tonal contrast to create a portfolio of balanced images.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_next"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Tension&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rs_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rs_2"&gt;
Figure 2: Tension&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Photography Ideas: Tension" height="400" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/photography-ideas-2/photogrpahy-ideas-2-2.jpg" width="267" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
It is not always desirable to create harmonious images. In fact, it 
is sometimes desired to deliberately create tension in an image. There 
are many ways that tension can be created. Three of the most popular 
are: curves, tonal contrast, and unequal visual weight.
    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Curves:&lt;/span&gt; One of the most 
effective ways to create tension is through the use of curves. Curves 
create tension by causing the viewer's attention to constantly jump from
 one part of an image to another -- never resting at any one point in an
 image. One way that curves can achieve this end is to have two or more 
diagonal curves that point in different directions. The viewer's eyes 
will first follow one diagonal, then, the other. Another way to create 
tension with curves  is to use multiple, jagged curves that run in many 
different directions. When done properly, this can  create not only a 
visual tension but also  an uncomfortable mood that adds to the tension.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Tonal Contrast:&lt;/span&gt; Harsh tonal
 contrast can add to the sense of tension. This is particularly true if 
there is more than one area of high contrast in an image. The viewer's 
eyes jump from one area of high contrast to another. This, again, 
creates constant eye movement -- which generates tension.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Visual Weight:&lt;/span&gt; Deliberately
 creating an image that is visually unbalanced also creates tension. In 
this case, one part of an image seems heavier that the rest of the 
image. The viewer's eyes roam around trying to find balance, but they 
never find it.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Photography Project:&lt;/span&gt; Your 
goal in this project is to use curves, tonal contrast, and visual weight
 to create a portfolio of images that exhibit a sense of tension.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Framing&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 3: Framing&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Photography Ideas: Framing" height="267" id="Placeholder4" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/photography-ideas-2/photogrpahy-ideas-2-3.jpg" style="background-color: #990099;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Placing a frame around the center of interest of an image can be a
 very effective way of improving an image. The frame serves to help 
define the center of interest, add depth to an image, and lead the 
viewer's eye.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Define:&lt;/span&gt; When used properly,
 the frame provides details that help to define the center of interest. 
Essentially, the frame puts the center of interest into context by 
showing some of the environment in which the center of interest exists.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Depth:&lt;/span&gt; The frame provides a foreground that adds depth to an image.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Lead: &lt;/span&gt;The frame also serves to lead the viewer's eye to the center of interest. The frame essentially focuses the attention.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Photography Project:&lt;/span&gt; Capture a number of images using frames.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_next"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Color in Black and White&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 4: Color in Black and White&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Photography Ideas: Color in Black &amp;amp; White" height="267" id="Placeholder2" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/photography-ideas-2/photogrpahy-ideas-2-4.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
This technique involves creating an image where the center of 
interest is in color. Everything else is in black and white. The goal of
 this technique is to focus the attention on the center of interest.&lt;br /&gt;

    This technique is done in an image editing program such as 
Photoshop. There are a number of ways that the technique can be carried 
out. One way that works well is as follows.&lt;br /&gt;

    1. Open the image in the image editing program. The original image will be placed on the Background layer.&lt;br /&gt;

    2. Create a second layer above the Background layer. Fill this layer with neutral gray. Name this the Gray layer.&lt;br /&gt;

    3. Create a selection that selects everything except the center 
of interest. Use this selection to create a mask on the Gray layer that 
hides the center of interest.&lt;br /&gt;

    4. Set the Blend mode of the Gray layer to Saturation.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Photography Project:&lt;/span&gt; The 
goal of this project is to create a group of images where the  center of
 interest is in color while everything else is in black and white. One 
nice thing about this project is that you do not need to go take any new
 images. You can use images that are already in your collection.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    
    &lt;h3&gt;
Chiaroscuro&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ls_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ls_2"&gt;
Figure 5: Chiarscuro&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="400" id="Placeholder3" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/photography-ideas-2/photogrpahy-ideas-2-5.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="267" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Chiaroscuro is a style of image that is specifically designed to 
create a dramatic modeling of a subject through the combination of high 
contrast and low key.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;High Contrast:&lt;/span&gt; The light is
 positioned such that only certain parts of the subject are illuminated.
 The rest of the image falls quickly into shadow. Specifically, the 
center of interest is illuminated; the rest of the image is not. This 
does four things. First, it draws attention to the center of interest. 
      Second, it removes any distracting detail from the rest of the 
image.
      Third, it tends to create a feeling of depth in an image. Fourth, 
it creates a very dramatic image because of the high tonal contrast.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Low Key:&lt;/span&gt; Low key means that
 the majority of the image is composed of dark tones. With chiaroscuro, 
since only the center of interest is well lit, most of the image is 
composed of dark tones. The low key nature of chiaroscuro tends to 
create a moody image.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Mood:&lt;/span&gt; From the two 
paragraphs above, it can be seen that the chiaroscuro technique is 
generally used to create dramatic, moody images.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Lighting:&lt;/span&gt; Two types of 
lighting can be used to create chiaroscuro images: natural light and 
flash. Creating chiaroscuro images outdoors, with natural light, can be a
 bit challenging. The most common way to do this is to shoot on a cloudy
 day and hope for a break in the clouds that allows a shaft of light 
through that illuminates your subject. When shooting chiaroscuro 
indoors, the light from a single window can be used to light a subject.&lt;br /&gt;

    Shooting chiaroscuro with flash is much easier. Barn doors (or 
other objects that can be used to block or focus the light) can be used.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Photography Project:&lt;/span&gt; For 
this project, you will seek to create chiaroscuro images. This project 
will require you to pay close attention to the light and how it falls on
 the objects you are photographing.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_next"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Reflections&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 6: Reflections&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Photography Ideas: Reflections" height="267" id="Placeholder5" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/photography-ideas-2/photogrpahy-ideas-2-6.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Reflections provide a great opportunity for creating images. Most reflection shots will be from either glass or water.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Glass:&lt;/span&gt; Reflections on glass
 will be found mostly in buildings. So, these types of shots will be 
located primarily in cities or suburban areas. Focusing can become an 
issue with reflections on glass. The issue is whether the image is all 
about the reflection or about a subject that can be seen through the 
window with the reflection simply superimposed over the subject. Thus, 
special care must be taken to ensure that the camera is focusing on the 
proper object.&lt;br /&gt;

    Water: Photographing water reflections is a lot of fun. These 
types of opportunities often result in abstract images with the 
reflection providing a rather distorted interpretation of the objects 
that surround the body of water.&lt;br /&gt;

    In order to create water reflections, a body of water that is not
 too disturbed will need to be located (if the water surface is too 
disturbed, the reflected objects will not be recognizable). Next, the 
body of water will need to be surrounded by one or more objects that 
reflect in the water. Objects that are brightly colored often work well.
 For example, flowers along a slow moving stream can produce colorful 
reflections.&lt;br /&gt;

    The shutter speed must be carefully chosen as it determines how 
the reflection will appear in the image. Longer shutter speeds will 
produce more accurate reflections (i.e., they look a lot like the 
original objects) because they smooth out the disturbances in the water.
 Shorter shutter speeds create more abstract reflections as the 
disturbances in the water are frozen in place.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Photography Project:&lt;/span&gt; Reflections are the goal of this project. Try creating reflection images with both glass and water.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</description><thr:total xmlns:thr="http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0">0</thr:total><author>naswarman.com.pk@gmail.com (A A)</author></item><item><title>Photography Ideas</title><link>http://about-digital-photography-0.blogspot.com/2011/11/photography-ideas.html</link><pubDate>Tue, 15 Nov 2011 03:11:00 -0800</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-2842667588749990803.post-9041889097124580232</guid><description>&lt;div dir="ltr" style="text-align: left;" trbidi="on"&gt;
&lt;div class="text_block"&gt;

    &lt;h1&gt;
Photography Ideas&lt;/h1&gt;
&lt;h1&gt;
Part 1&lt;/h1&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
Article and Photography by Ron Bigelow&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new"&gt;

    &lt;div align="left"&gt;
If you find yourself reading this article, it is 
likely that you are looking for  photography ideas for some photo 
projects. You might be thinking along the lines of something like a 
photo scrapbook, picture a day, or nature project. While these are all 
worthwhile projects, this article takes a different approach. As long as
 you are going to be spending some time on a photo project, why not 
select a project that develops your photography skills? That way, you 
will complete the project a better photographer than when you started.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div align="left"&gt;
Thus, this article series presents twelve 
photography ideas. Each idea is a photography skill and can be used as 
the basis for a photography project. The recommendation is that you 
select one of the skills and spend a specific period of time utilizing 
that skill to  capture images. Essentially, your photo project will be 
to develop a portfolio of images centered on that specific skill. Once 
you have mastered a skill, you can move on to another skill and develop a
 portfolio around that skill.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div align="left"&gt;
With this approach, you should end up with some 
impressive portfolios and an enhanced skill set. The skills that will be
 covered are:&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_centered"&gt;

  
    &lt;div class="image_2lc_1"&gt;

      
      &lt;div class="image_2lc_2"&gt;

        &lt;h3 align="left"&gt;
Contents&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_2lc_3"&gt;

          &lt;div class="image_2lc_5"&gt;

            &lt;ul&gt;&lt;div align="center"&gt;
Color&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div align="center"&gt;
Tonal Contrast&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div align="center"&gt;
Triangles&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div align="center"&gt;
Negative Space&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div align="center"&gt;
Mood&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div align="center"&gt;
Low Light&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_2lc_6"&gt;

          &lt;div class="image_2lc_8"&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;&lt;div align="center"&gt;
Balance&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div align="center"&gt;
Tension&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div align="center"&gt;
Frames&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div align="center"&gt;
Color in Black and White&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div align="center"&gt;
Chiaroscuro&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div align="center"&gt;
Reflections&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Color&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 1: Color&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Photography Ideas: Color" height="267" id="Placeholder" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/photography-ideas/photography-ideas-1-1.jpg" style="background-color: #990099;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Color is a very good place to start because color grabs people's 
attention. For instance, a couple of the most popular photographic 
subjects are sunsets and flowers, and the primary reason that people 
like sunset and flower images is because of the color. Thus, the 
utilization of color is one of the most effective means of creating 
impact in images. However, to use color effectively, one must understand
 a little about color.&lt;br /&gt;

    There are three aspects of color that can be used to create dramatic images: hue, saturation, and contrast.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Hue:&lt;/span&gt; Hue is what we normally think of as color (technically, hue is determined by the wavelength of the light).&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;

    One of the biggest reasons that hue has such a large impact on 
photography is that our visual system has different degrees of 
sensitivity to different hues. With respect to the three primary colors 
(red, green, and blue), the human visual system is most sensitive to 
red, is moderately sensitively to green, and is much less sensitive to 
blue (approximately two thirds of the eyes' color detecting cones detect
 red, one third detect green, and only one percent detect blue). As a 
result, images with a lot of red (or related colors such as orange) tend
 to really grab people's attention. So, one way to create eye-catching 
images is to start with subjects that contain these colors.&lt;br /&gt;

    However, there is more to hue than just its affect on the human 
perceptual system. Hue also has an emotional impact. In many situations,
 the warm colors (e.g., red, orange, and yellow) bring feelings of 
comfort. The red glow of a fireplace, a gorgeous orange sunset, and a 
beautiful yellow flower are all examples of the comforting affect of the
 warm colors. However, in some instances, red can bring feelings of 
alarm or excitement (that is why stop signs, stop lights, and fire 
trucks are painted red). Green often brings feeling of newness or 
freshness (as in a lush, green, springtime meadow). Blue tends to create
 feelings of calm as in a peaceful ocean as dusk approaches.&lt;br /&gt;

    So, what does this mean for a photographer? Basically, it means 
that the predominant hues in an image should be selected carefully to 
match the mood of the image. As an example, the proper use of green 
could enhance the mood of a landscape, but it might detract from the 
mood of a romantic image.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Saturation:&lt;/span&gt; Saturation 
refers to the "pureness" of a color. For instance, a saturated red is 
perceived as a very intense red while a less saturated red is perceived 
as a diluted or washed out red. Saturation is important because it helps
 determine the strength of response a person has to a color. Highly 
saturated colors create strong reactions in the human perceptual system 
while poorly saturated colors create a much weaker reaction. From a 
photographer's perspective, this means that saturated colors will create
 a stronger reaction to our images.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Contrast:&lt;/span&gt; Color contrast 
refers to using two or more colors that are different enough that they 
contrast. Using color contrast is one of the most effective ways to 
create powerful images as the human visual system is highly stimulated 
by contrasting colors (in other words, our visual system is set up to 
respond to contrasting color). So, why not use this to create great 
images by looking for subjects that have contrasting color.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Photography Project:&lt;/span&gt; Your 
assignment is to create a portfolio of images that uses color to draw 
the attention of viewers. Use your knowledge of how hue, saturation, and
 color contrast can be used to enhance images.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Tonal Contrast&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 2: Tonal Contrast&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Photography Ideas: Tonal Contrast" height="266" id="Placeholder2" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/photography-ideas/photography-ideas-1-2.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Along with color, one of the best ways to grab a viewer's 
attention is the use of tonal contrast. Specifically, it is the use of 
high tonal contrast that draws the attention. As with color contrast, 
tonal contrast stimulates the human visual system. In other words, the 
eyes and brain are programmed to take special notice of areas of high 
tonal contrast. This is a great opportunity for photographers as we can 
use the way the human visual system has been set up to our advantage. 
This is done by including high contrast objects in our images.&lt;br /&gt;

    Now, just including high contrast objects in an image is not 
enough. The contrast must be managed. What that means is that the 
contrast must be placed in the proper areas of an image. In most cases, 
this can be achieved by following two rules:&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Make the positive space high contrast.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Make sure that no other areas of the image are high contrast.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
When the positive space is high contrast, a viewer's eyes will 
quickly be draw to the positive space. The high contrast at the positive
 space will also serve to help keep the attention on the positive space.
 The reason that it is generally a good idea to have no other high 
contrast objects in an image is that any other high contrast objects 
will tend to draw the attention away from the positive space. This 
generally weakens an image.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;
Of course, all rules can be broken at times.
 Sometimes, having two areas of high contrast can create an intentional 
tension in an image. The viewer's attention will bounce back and forth 
between the areas of contrast -- causing the tension. This can work 
well, but only if you specifically design the image to create this 
tension.
    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Photography Project:&lt;/span&gt; Your 
assignment is to create a portfolio of images that uses tonal contrast 
to create powerful images. The main goal of this exercise is to manage 
the contrast in the images -- specifically placing the contrast where it
 will have maximum impact.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Triangles&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 3: Triangles&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Photography Idea: Triangles" height="267" id="Placeholder4" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/photography-ideas/photography-ideas-1-3.jpg" style="background-color: #990099;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
There are many compositional techniques in photography. One that 
works very well when there are multiple objects in an image is the use 
of triangles. The technique involves composing an image in such a way 
that three or more objects form a triangle.&lt;br /&gt;

    Three objects are needed to form the points of the triangle. 
Imaginary, diagonal lines then connect the three points. This 
configuration creates a very dynamic image. A viewer's eyes will tend to
 travel back and forth along the diagonal lines from one triangle point 
to another. If there are more than three objects in the image, the 
additional objects need to lie along the diagonal lines.&lt;br /&gt;

    The objects should either be similar (e.g., several flowers) or 
related in some way (e.g., different types of equipment in a machine 
shop).&lt;br /&gt;

    There are a couple of ways that triangles can be used: single positive space and multiple centers of interest.&lt;br /&gt;

    Many successful images have a single positive space. In this 
case, one of the objects that resides at a point on the triangle will 
function as the positive space. The other objects on the triangle will 
serve to support and enhance the positive space. These other points can 
be made subservient to the positive space  in various ways such as 
reducing their sharpness, contrast, color saturation, or size.&lt;br /&gt;

    When multiple centers of interest are used, all of the objects on
 the triangle should be of equal importance in the image. One example of
 this use of triangles is a family, group portrait where the heads of 
the family members are arranged into a triangle. Each family member's 
head is of equal importance and should be given equal weight in the 
portrait.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Photography Project:&lt;/span&gt; For 
this project, your goal is to produce a group of photos that use 
triangles as their main compositional element. You might want to 
consider trying the technique with a variety of subjects (e.g., people, 
nature, city structures, and household objects).&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Negative Space&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rs_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rs_2"&gt;
Figure 4: Negative Space&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Photography Ideas: Negative Space" height="400" id="Placeholder3" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/photography-ideas/photography-ideas-1-4.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="267" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Any image consists of three components:&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Frame: The border that defines the edges of the image.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Positive space: The subject of the image.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Negative space: The space between the positive space and the frame.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
When composing images, many people tend to think primarily in 
terms of the positive space. In other words, they think primarily about 
the main subject of the image. The area surrounding the positive space, 
the negative space, ends up being whatever happened to be there at the 
time the image was taken. This is a mistake! When properly utilized, the
 negative space can serve two very important functions:&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;The negative space can serve to define the positive space.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;The negative space can make the positive space stand out.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
The negative space can serve to help define the positive space by
 providing detail about the positive space. For example, a close-up of a
 waterfall may show the beauty of the falling water, but it may not show
 any hint of the environment in which the waterfall exists. Is the 
waterfall in a crowded, urban park or in a forest? We can not tell from 
the close-up. However, if the camera is backed up to show the waterfall 
surrounded by the negative space of a lush, misty rainforest, that 
negative space provides much detail that helps to define the waterfall.&lt;br /&gt;

    However, when using the negative space in this manner, it is 
important that the negative space not overwhelm the positive space. For 
instance, in this example, the rainforest might be rendered slightly out
 of focus so that it doesn’t compete with the waterfall.&lt;br /&gt;

    The negative space can also help to make the positive space stand
 out. This is because the negative space can help to control the eye of a
 viewer. When used in this manner, the negative space is often fairly 
devoid of detail (this removes any distracting detail from the negative 
space). In addition, the negative space often contrasts in color or tone
 with the positive space.  This helps to focus the viewer's attention on
 the positive space -- thus, making it stand out.&lt;br /&gt;

    Consequently, to create powerful images, photographers need to 
consider the negative space when composing images. The negative space 
needs to be deliberately designed to either help define the positive 
space or to make the positive space stand out.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Photography Project:&lt;/span&gt; 
Creating a portfolio of images that have well designed negative spaces 
is the goal of this project. For each image, the negative space should 
be carefully designed into the composition. &lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Mood&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 5: Mood&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Photography Ideas: Mood" height="267" id="Placeholder5" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/photography-ideas/photography-ideas-1-5.jpg" style="background-color: #990099;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
The use of mood in an image can be a very powerful tool. Mood 
helps an image communicate an emotion. This helps to draw a viewer into 
an image. There are many ways to create mood in an image. Two of the 
most popular are light and weather.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Light:&lt;/span&gt; Light has a very 
powerful effect on the mood of an image. Different kinds of light will 
create different moods. Light that occurs in the middle of the day 
generally creates a very harsh mood. This is because mid-day light has a
 very high contrast and desaturates colors. This type of light might 
work well with a scene of an abandoned ghost town in the middle of the 
desert. The mid-day light would help to emphasize the harsh environment 
in which the town existed.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_break"&gt;

    On the other hand, photographers often want to create a more 
inviting mood. For this, light that occurs during the magic hour (the 
half hour after sunrise and the half hour before sunset) is excellent. 
This light is generally diffuse and saturated. This can be used to 
create a warm or romantic feel to an image.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Weather:&lt;/span&gt; Weather is another
 excellent way to create mood. Specifically, inclement weather is one of
 the best ways to create mood. That's right, when your friends are 
inside because of the bad weather, you may want to grab your camera and 
head outdoors. The beginning and end of storms is an ideal time to 
capture moody images. The dramatic clouds and diffuse light work very 
well for this purpose. Also, misty or foggy days can be used to create 
images with a mystique.&lt;br /&gt;

    Whether using light or weather to create mood, the most important
 thing is to first determine exactly what mood you want an image to 
convey. Then, carefully select the light and weather to create the 
proper mood. This may require some advanced planning. You may need to 
create an idea in your mind of what you would like to create (this is 
referred to as &lt;a href="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/previsualization/previsualization.htm"&gt;previsualization&lt;/a&gt;). Then, you will need to wait for the proper conditions to capture the image.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Photography Project:&lt;/span&gt; Use light and weather to create a portfolio with images that are characterized by mood.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Low Light&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 6: Low Light&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Photograph Ideas: Low Light" height="267" id="Placeholder6" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/photography-ideas/photography-ideas-1-6.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
When the sun goes down, many photographers pack up their camera 
equipment and head home. Experienced photographers know better. Some 
terrific shots can be captured after the sun has crossed the horizon. 
There are many such opportunities. A couple of the most popular involve 
shooting by moonlight and long exposures.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Moonlight:&lt;/span&gt; The moon casts a
 soft, gentle light over the earth during a full moon. This can create 
some great images. If the moon is to be in the image, the shot will most
 likely need to be taken slightly after the moon rises or shortly before
 it sets. This will place the moon just over the horizon. For these 
types of shots, it is necessary to set the exposure to keep detail in 
the moon. Otherwise, the moon becomes just a white blob. Another 
alternative is to set the camera on a tripod and take two exposures. One
 exposure is set to keep detail in the moon. The other exposure is set 
to keep detail in the rest of the image. The two exposures can then be 
combined during image editing.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Long Exposures:&lt;/span&gt; Long 
exposures can also be used in low light situations. Of course, long 
exposures let more light into the camera allowing images in low light. 
However, long exposures can be used for more than that. They can be used
 for creative control. For instance, long exposures can be used to blur 
motion. One example is using long exposures for beach shots. The wave 
motion will be blurred giving the impression that the waves have formed a
 sort of cloud that envelopes the coast. Similarly, long exposures can 
be used to blur traffic. This produces a blurred stream of the 
headlights and tail lights of cars that travel along the roads.&lt;br /&gt;

    The use of long exposures is limited only by your imagination.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Photography Project:&lt;/span&gt; This 
project focuses on low light situations. The goal is to use your 
imagination to identify and capture images that have been shot after the
 sun goes down.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</description><thr:total xmlns:thr="http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0">0</thr:total><author>naswarman.com.pk@gmail.com (A A)</author></item><item><title>Previsualization -- Part II</title><link>http://about-digital-photography-0.blogspot.com/2011/11/previsualization-part-ii.html</link><pubDate>Tue, 15 Nov 2011 03:11:00 -0800</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-2842667588749990803.post-3672498143011625378</guid><description>&lt;div dir="ltr" style="text-align: left;" trbidi="on"&gt;
&lt;div class="text_block"&gt;

    &lt;h1&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/h1&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
Article and Photography by Ron Bigelow&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new"&gt;
In Part I of
 this series, 
    the art of previsualizing an image before taking a shot was covered.
 
    As presented in Part I, a photographer would, likely, be standing at
 a scene 
    previsualizing how the processing of an image of the scene would be 
handled and how the image would look when it was printed. 
    However, previsualization can be taken to a higher level. In the 
next step of previsualization, a photographer previsualizes how a scene 
will appear at some future point in time while under a different set of 
conditions.
    This is the second of three levels of previsualization (the third 
level will be covered in Part III of this series).
    This is important because photographers often find great photo 
opportunities under conditions that are not ideal for photography at the
 time the opportunities are discovered. For instance, the light might 
not be very good, or the weather may be bad. Whatever the cause of the 
poor photographic conditions, the photographer must be able to 
previsualize what the subject would look like under ideal photographic 
conditions. Only then can the photographer decide if it is worth coming 
back for a shooting session at a more appropriate time.&lt;br /&gt;

    Figures 1 to 3 illustrate this concept. Figures 1 and 2 show a 
desert scene during the day. At this time, the subject certainly doesn't
 look very appealing. The light is very harsh, the colors are heavily 
desaturated, and the composition is very bad. One might be tempted to 
walk right past this scene and continue looking for more promising photo
 opportunities. However, that would be a mistake. If the scene is 
previsualized, a photographer could see the scene under a different set 
of circumstances and with a better composition. For instance, a 
photographer might previsualize the scene during the &lt;a href="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/magic/magic.htm"&gt;magic hour&lt;/a&gt;,
 with a rising moon, and from a much better viewpoint. In fact, that is 
exactly what was done. The result can be seen in Figure 3. &lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_centered_break"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_2lc_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_2lc_2"&gt;

        &lt;div class="image_2lc_3"&gt;

          &lt;div class="image_2lc_4"&gt;
Figure 1: Desert Subject during Day&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_2lc_6"&gt;

          &lt;div class="image_2lc_7"&gt;
Figure 2: &lt;span class="image_2lc_4"&gt;Desert Subject during Day&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_2lc_2"&gt;

        &lt;div class="image_2lc_3"&gt;

          &lt;div class="image_2lc_5"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" class="image_border" height="233" id="Placeholoder" name="Placeholoder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/previsualization-2/previsualiztion-2-1.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="350" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_2lc_6"&gt;

          &lt;div class="image_2lc_8"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" class="image_border" height="233" id="Placeholder" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/previsualization-2/previsualiztion-2-2.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="350" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;
As can be seen in Figure 3, the use of 
previsualization to previsualize the subject matter at a different time 
and under a different set of conditions resulted in an image that is far
 superior to what was seen at the time the subject was first 
encountered.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_centered"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1c_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1c_2"&gt;
Figure 3: Result of Previsualization &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;img alt="" class="image_border" height="266" id="Placeholder" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/previsualization-2/previsualiztion-2-3.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
What to Previsualize&lt;/h3&gt;
While all of the information covered in Part I of this series 
still applies when previsualization is used to previsualize a subject &lt;span class="section_next"&gt;at a different time and under a different set of conditions&lt;/span&gt;, there are some items to which one must pay particular attention:&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Composition&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Light&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Shadows&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Weather&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Wind&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Composition&lt;/h3&gt;
The first item that must be previsualized is the composition. 
This is very important. Without a strong composition, no photographic 
subject will make a dynamic image. However, when previsualizing the 
composition, two problems often occur. The first problem is that it may 
be difficult to find a view point that will allow one to create the 
composition that one previsualized. In other words, it may be easy to 
see a beautiful image in one's head, but it may be very difficult to 
find a position that will allow that image to be actually created. This 
was an issue with the image above. The tall rock formation looked like 
it might make a very good image, and I quickly saw an image, in my mind,
 of how I would like the final image to appear. However, it took some 
hiking and evaluation of various viewpoints before it was decided that 
one of the viewpoints would allow me to create the image that I had 
previsualized.&lt;br /&gt;

    The second problem that can occur arises  because  there is a 
strong interdependence between the composition and the light. A great 
composition can only reach its full potential if the right light is 
achieved. A great composition becomes useless if the composition falls 
into shadow, the light comes from the wrong direction, or the light has 
the wrong color. Thus, when evaluating a composition, one must also 
evaluate the anticipated light. So, the issue really becomes one of what
 a particular composition will look like under a specific set of 
lighting conditions. This leads directly to the next item: light&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_next_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Light&lt;/h3&gt;
Light has five components that must be previsualized:&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt; Quality&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Color&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Saturation&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Direction &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Blockages&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;span class="bold"&gt;Quality:&lt;/span&gt; Light can be either soft or 
hard. Soft light is a very diffused and flattering light. Soft light has
 low contrast. The bright areas and shadow areas tend to blend together 
easily. The transitions between sunlight and shadow tend to be gradual. 
Hard light is a very direct, harsh, and often unflattering light. Hard 
light has a very high contrast, and the transitions between light and 
shadow are usually rather abrupt.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="bold"&gt;Color: &lt;/span&gt;Visible light is composed of a 
mixture of colors. Neutral light is composed of an equal amount of each 
of these colors. However, light is not always neutral. Often, the color 
balance of the light has been altered. Most frequently, this occurs 
because one or more of the colors have been, at least partially, 
filtered out of the light. When this happens, the color of the light 
changes. Because of this, the light is constantly changing color all day
 long, and this affects the color balance of images that are taken. &lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="bold"&gt;Saturation: &lt;/span&gt;The saturation of light 
changes throughout the day. Light usually has the highest saturation at 
the ends of the day and the least saturation during the middle of the 
day.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="bold"&gt;Direction:&lt;/span&gt; Anticipating and 
previsualizing the direction of the light is critical. Only when the 
direction of the light with respect to the subject is understood is it 
possible to predict how the light will interact with the subject.&lt;br /&gt;

    Unfortunately, it is not always obvious where the sun will be at 
any particular time. After hiking for hours on serpentine trails through
 mountainous terrain, a photographer can lose any sense of direction. 
Since most good landscape photography is taken around sunrise or sunset,
 three pieces of information are required to resolve this dilemma:&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;The time the sun will rise or set&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;The  point on the compass (in degrees) where the sun will sit at the time of sunrise or sunset&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;The direction of north&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
The first two pieces of information can be determined with a good
 GPS. The GPS will display the time the sun will rise or set and the 
position on the compass where the sun will reside at that time. Knowing 
the position on the compass where the sun will reside at photo time, a 
compass can be used to point to where the sun will be in relation to the
 subject at that time.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="bold"&gt;Blockage: &lt;/span&gt;The quality, color, and 
saturation of the light are partly determined by how high in the sky the
 sun is positioned. The higher in the sky that the sun is positioned, 
the harder, cooler, and less saturated the light. This becomes an issue 
because, often, objects block the sun when it is lower in the sky. For 
instance, mountains may block the sun as it drops toward the horizon. 
Thus, shadows cover the adjacent terrain. If this is the case, the photo
 session will have to occur before the sun drops below the mountains 
(assuming that the photographer doesn't want everything in shadow). This
 means that the scene can only be photographed while the sun is still 
fairly high in the sky. As already mentioned, this will result in a 
light that tends to be harder, cooler, and less saturated than if the 
sun was lower in the sky. Previsualizing the scene with these conditions
 will allow a photographer to determine if these lighting conditions 
will result in the image that is desired. If not, the photographer will 
know that is time to move on to better opportunities.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_next"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Shadows&lt;/h3&gt;
The topic of shadows is related to the direction of the light as 
covered above. Until the direction of the light is known, it is 
impossible to know how the shadows will fall and how the shadows will 
define the subject.&lt;br /&gt;

    Some photographers may tend to think of shadows as simply a lack 
of light.  It would be easy to draw the conclusion that one need only 
focus on the light and let the shadows fall where they may. This would 
be a major mistake -- for light is nothing without shadows. Shadows are 
not simply dark masses that border the light. Rather, shadows are an 
entity as alive as the light. It is the shadows that shape the light, 
that draw attention to the light, and that integrate with the light to 
produce striking photographic opportunities. If we are to reach our full
 potential as photographers, we must think as much in terms of mastering
 the shadows as we do of mastering the light.&lt;br /&gt;

    Thus, it is critical to previsualize the shadows. The shadows 
will have a very large impact on the mood of the image. Figure 3, above,
 is a perfect example. The large rock formation has two types of rock. 
The lower rock has horizontal lines running across it. The upper rock 
forms spires that have vertical lines. Long before the image was shot, 
it was realized that the vertical spires could add drama to the image 
due to their rugged form and jagged shape. However, the lower rock, with
 the horizontal lines, had more of a static feel. Therefore, when the 
image was previsualized, the shadows were seen as covering the lower 
rock in order to hide the detail of the horizontal lines and to create a
 tonal contrast with the spires. As can be seen in Figure 3, this is 
exactly how the image was captured. In short, determining how the 
shadows would fall was one of the most important parts of previsualizing
 the image in Figure 3.&lt;br /&gt;

    Figure 4 is another example. Determining how the shadow would 
fall across the mountain (seen as a reflection in the beaver pond) was a
 very important part of previsualizing this image. At the time the area 
was being scouted, the pond was still in the direct light of the sun. 
This light was far too harsh to produce the desired image. In 
previsualizing the image, it was decided that the pond would be in the 
shadow of the northern mountains. This would help create a sense of calm
 that would be lacking if the pond was in direct light. On the other 
hand, it was determined that the reflected mountains would be partly in 
shadow and partly in the late afternoon sun to increase the dramatic 
effect by throwing the jagged edge of the shadow across the face of the 
mountain. In addition, the late afternoon light would hit the surface of
 the mountains at a low angle, thus, bringing out the texture and 
ruggedness of the mountains.&lt;br /&gt;

    In addition, the issue of blockage, as covered above, was an 
issue when previsualizing this image. Ideally, it would have been great 
to have some alpenglow on the reflected mountains, but this was not 
possible due to blockage. By the time that the sun got low enough in the
 sky to produce alpenglow, the reflected mountains would be completely 
in the shadow of the northern mountains.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_centered_break"&gt;

   &lt;div class="image_1c_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1c_2"&gt;
Figure 4: Previsualizing Shadows &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;img alt="" class="image_border" height="267" id="Placeholder" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/previsualization-2/previsualiztion-2-4.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_next"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Weather&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rs_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rs_2"&gt;
Figure 5: Previsualizing Weather&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="400" id="Placeholder2" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/previsualization-2/previsualiztion-2-5.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="267" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Weather is a critical part of previsualization. Without the 
proper weather, it is often impossible to capture the appropriate mood. 
Figure 5 is an example. I had seen photos of this waterfall in different
 weather and lighting conditions. Based on these photos, I was able to 
previsualize this image a day or two before the hike to the location 
began. It was determined that this rainforest waterfall would have the 
desired mood only if it was photographed while the rainforest was wet. 
Therefore, I started out on an early morning hike in the middle of a 
rainstorm. After a couple of hours in the rain, a break in the rain 
occurred, and I was able to set up and capture the shot.&lt;br /&gt;

    The important point here is that previsualization of the affect 
that the weather would have in creating a misty, lush environment was 
critical to the image. Thus, the rain was an essential part of creating 
this image.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Wind&lt;/h3&gt;
Wind is another important factor that must be previsualized. The 
wind's affect on water and vegetation can have a major impact on one's 
ability to capture an image. For instance, wildflower shots become very 
difficult to capture in strong winds. Also, shots of lakes become 
difficult in the wind if a calm lake surface is desired.&lt;br /&gt;

    Consequently, previsualizing and planning for wind conditions is 
critical for many images. For instance, if a previsualization requires 
calm wind, checking the weather report for wind conditions and shooting 
in the early morning when the wind is generally calmer would be a good 
idea.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</description><thr:total xmlns:thr="http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0">0</thr:total><author>naswarman.com.pk@gmail.com (A A)</author></item><item><title>Interpolation Revisited</title><link>http://about-digital-photography-0.blogspot.com/2011/11/interpolation-revisited.html</link><pubDate>Tue, 15 Nov 2011 03:11:00 -0800</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-2842667588749990803.post-3501943188739560393</guid><description>&lt;div dir="ltr" style="text-align: left;" trbidi="on"&gt;
&lt;div class="text_block"&gt;

    &lt;h1&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/h1&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
Article and Photography by Ron Bigelow&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new"&gt;

          Back in 2005, I wrote a fairly extensive article series on 
interpolation. The series looked at several different methods of 
interpolation. The conclusion of the series was that, at 200% linear 
interpolation, there was not much difference between the interpolation 
methods. At larger interpolations, the best interpolation method often 
depended on the image.&lt;br /&gt;

    A lot has happened with digital photography since that time. 
Camera sensors have increased in size and quality. Photo editing 
software has substantially improved. Printer  resolution and  gamuts 
have increased. Of course, interpolation methods and software have 
improved as well.&lt;br /&gt;

    I began to wonder if the results of the  testing that I had 
conducted in the previous interpolation article series were still valid.
 In short, it was time to do some new testing. Consequently, the purpose
 of this article is to review current interpolation methods by 
presenting the results of my testing.&lt;br /&gt;

    This article is more constrained than the earlier article series 
for two reasons. First, the theoretical background for interpolation has
 already been covered in the prior article series. If you wish to 
understand the theory, please read the previous series, Interpolation.
 Second, the prior article series looked at 200%, 300%, and 400% linear 
interpolations. This article evaluates only 200% linear interpolations. 
The reason for this is that sensor sizes have increased to the point 
where it is unnecessary for most photographers to interpolate much more 
than 200% linearly. An image from an eight megapixel camera interpolated
 linearly 200% and printed at 300 PPI will create approximately a 16" x 
24" inch print. Similarly, an image from a twenty-one megapixel camera 
will produce a 24" x 36" print. Most photographers do not need to print 
larger than this.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Interpolation Methods evaluated&lt;/h3&gt;
Six interpolation methods were evaluated:&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Bicubic&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Bicubic Smoother&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Stairstep&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Genuine Fractals&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Blow Up&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;PhotoZoom&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
The first two interpolations  can be accessed through Photoshop's
 Image Size dialogue box. On the other hand, you will not find a 
Stairstep interpolation method in Photoshop. Rather, it is a procedure 
that is followed using Bicubic interpolation. With Stairstep 
interpolation, the interpolation is done in small increments using 
Bicubic interpolation. In other words, the interpolation is done in 
several small steps rather than one step as in traditional Bicubic 
interpolation. Generally, Stairstep interpolation is done in 10% 
increments (each interpolation is made 10% larger than the last) until 
the desired image size is reached. The immediate advantage of these 
interpolation methods is that they are free for anyone that already has 
Photoshop. The last three interpolation methods are found in 
interpolation software packages offered by other companies.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_next"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Interpolation Results&lt;/h3&gt;
All of the interpolation methods were applied to three different 
images. Since the results were similar for each image, the results for 
only one image are presented here. Figure 1 shows the image that was 
used for the interpolations show here. Figures 2 -- 7 show a section 
from the image, at 100% view on the monitor, after it was interpolated 
and a moderate amount of sharpening was applied (the last  image has a 
watermark since I used a trial version of PhotoZoom). &lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 1: Rattlesnake Image&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img height="267" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/interpolation-revisited/Mojave%20Green.jpg" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_centered_break"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1c_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1c_2"&gt;
Figure 2: Bicubic&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;img height="400" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/interpolation-revisited/mojave-bicubic.jpg" width="600" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_centered_next"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1c_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1c_2"&gt;
Figure 3: Bicubic Smoother&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;img height="400" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/interpolation-revisited/mojave-smoother.jpg" width="600" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_centered_break"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1c_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1c_2"&gt;
Figure 4: Stairstep&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;img height="400" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/interpolation-revisited/mojave-stairstep.jpg" width="600" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_centered_next"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1c_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1c_2"&gt;
Figure 5: Genuine Fractals&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;img height="400" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/interpolation-revisited/mojave-fractals.jpg" width="600" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_centered_break"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1c_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1c_2"&gt;
Figure 6: Blow Up&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;img height="400" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/interpolation-revisited/mojave-blow-up.jpg" width="600" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_centered_next"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1c_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1c_2"&gt;
Figure 7: PhotoZoom&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;img height="400" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/interpolation-revisited/mojave-photo-zoom.jpg" width="600" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Conclusion&lt;/h3&gt;
If you have been staring at these images and thinking that you 
don't see much of a difference, you have already reached the conclusion 
of this evaluation. At 200% linear interpolation, with the exception of 
Bicubic which tended to be of lower quality, I did not see much of a 
difference between these various interpolation methods.&lt;br /&gt;

    Now, please keep in mind that these images have lost some of 
their quality when they were prepared for the web. This reduces the 
differences between the images somewhat. The original, interpolated 
images do show small differences between the interpolation methods. 
However, in my opinion, the differences are minor (with the exception of
 Bicubic as previously mentioned), and it is often debatable as to which
 one looks the best. Furthermore, these differences are unlikely to be 
noticeable in a print. Basically, my conclusion is that, depending on 
the image, Stairstep or Bicubic Smoother interpolation did as well as 
the interpolation software packages at 200% linear interpolation. Notice
 that I indicated that this depended on the image. For some images, 
Stairstep did better than Bicubic Smoother. For other images, it was the
 other way around.&lt;br /&gt;

    Now, does this mean that one should not purchase one of the 
interpolation software packages? Actually, no. These conclusions only 
hold at 200% linear interpolation. For larger interpolations, Genuine 
Fractals, Blow Up, and PhotoZoom (as well as other interpolation 
packages) may very well produce superior results. Furthermore, these 
packages have additional functionality beyond interpolation. If they 
meet your needs, they may be a good idea.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</description><thr:total xmlns:thr="http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0">0</thr:total><author>naswarman.com.pk@gmail.com (A A)</author></item><item><title>How to Create the Highest Quality Prints</title><link>http://about-digital-photography-0.blogspot.com/2011/11/how-to-create-highest-quality-prints.html</link><pubDate>Tue, 15 Nov 2011 03:10:00 -0800</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-2842667588749990803.post-5068835659089738289</guid><description>&lt;div dir="ltr" style="text-align: left;" trbidi="on"&gt;
&lt;div class="text_block"&gt;

    &lt;h1&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/h1&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
Article and Photography by Ron Bigelow&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
Photoshop CS4 Used in this Tutorial&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new"&gt;

     The end goal for many photographers is the print. For many 
photographers, the print is the most satisfying way of experiencing an 
image. There is just something very gratifying about seeing one of your 
images as a beautiful print that everyone can enjoy.&lt;br /&gt;

    Not only do many photographers enjoy making prints, they are 
making larger prints than ever before. When I first started shooting 
digitally, I made 8"x10" prints. I remember when I got my first printer 
that made 13"x19" prints. I thought that the prints were huge. Now, I 
make 24"x36" prints. Panorama prints can even be larger.&lt;br /&gt;

    There can be no denying it. Large prints can be more effective in
 grabbing a viewer's attention and communicating the photographer's 
intent to the viewer than small prints. On the other hand, large prints 
also make weaknesses in an image much more obvious. Things such as a 
lack of sharpness, a poor mask, poor resolution, inferior editing 
technique, and a lack of printing skill that might go unnoticed in a 
small print will dramatically stand out in a large print. &lt;br /&gt;

    Thus, as prints become larger, ones workflow and editing 
technique must dramatically improve. With that in mind, the purpose of 
this article is to cover those aspects of workflow that will maximize 
the quality of prints. It should be kept in mind that these methods 
often require more time than simpler methods. Thus, these methods are 
not necessarily for all prints. Rather, they are designed for those 
times when a very high quality print is desired. For instance, these 
methods would be appropriate for a large fine art print that is intended
 for display. They would be overkill for a 5"x7" print that will end up 
in the family photo album.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;

    &lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

      &lt;h3&gt;
Start with Raw&lt;/h3&gt;
When a chef wants to create a gourmet meal, he starts with the 
best ingredients. It would be foolish for a chef to attempt to create an
 epicurean delight by starting with inferior ingredients. Similarly, any
 photographer that wishes to create the highest quality prints possible 
needs to start with the best data. That means that the image should be 
shot in raw.&lt;br /&gt;

      Shooting raw has many advantages over shooting JPGs. However, 
one of the biggest advantages has to do with the number of bits in an 
image. JPG files are eight bit. That means that there are eight bits of 
information for each of the three color channels (i.e., red, green, and 
blue). Those eight bits can produce 256 shades for each of the three 
color channels. On the other hand, raw files contain more bits. 
Currently, most of the DSLRs being released are fourteen bit. Thus, 
there are fourteen bits of information for each of the three color 
channels in a raw file. Once the image is converted, that works out to 
16,384 shades for each of the channels. So, what does this mean in 
practical terms? Actually, there are several ramifications.&lt;br /&gt;

      First, in some cases, color transitions are noticeably 
smoother. Since there are a lot more shades of each color with images 
that start as raw, adjacent colors are closer together than with JPG 
images. Thus, with raw, the transitions from one color to another are 
smoother because it entails many diminutive steps instead of a smaller 
number of larger steps as is the case with JPGs. Now, notice that this 
paragraph starts off by stating, "in some cases". Whether or not the 
differences in color transitions between raw and JPG are noticeable or 
not depend on a number of factors such as the tonal region (e.g., 
quarter tones vs. three quarter tones), amount of editing, and size of 
print). &lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;

    Second, there will be more shadow detail with images that start 
as raw files. This has to do with the fact that camera sensors are 
linear. Now, getting into a technical discussion of sensor linearity is 
beyond the scope of this article. However, in short, sensor linearity 
means that the sensor places most of the bits in the lighter shades and 
far fewer bits in the shadows. Thus, the shadows simply do not have 
nearly as many bits, and therefore shades, as the highlights. This is 
particularly a problem for JPG images. Since JPG images do not have a 
lot of bits to begin with, and more of the bits are allocated to the 
lighter shades, there are relatively few bits available for the shadows.
 Thus, there are few shades in the shadows, and detail suffers. With 
raw, the situation is significantly different. While raw files also have
 fewer bits in the shadows, there are so many bits that the shadow 
detail doesn't suffer as much. In general, a file that starts as a 
fourteen bit raw file will have sixty-four times as many shades in the 
shadows  than an eight bit JPG file.&lt;br /&gt;

    Third, images that start as raw files hold up to editing better 
than JPG files. When files are edited, some shades are spread farther 
apart. Other shades are lost due to quantization error. What this means 
is that the distance between one shade and the next can become larger 
due to the editing. If the distance between the shades becomes large 
enough, the human eye will be able to see the difference between 
adjacent shades. When this happens, posterization results. This is often
 seen as banding across areas of little detail (such as a featureless 
sky). Since the shades in images that started as raw files are much 
closer together than the shades in JPG files, posterization is much less
 likely to occur than with JPG images.&lt;br /&gt;

    Fourth, images that start as raw files are much more suitable for
 large color spaces than JPG images. Large color spaces include more 
colors. The shades in an image must be spread across  the colors in a 
color space. The larger the color space, the farther apart the shades 
must be to cover the entire color space. This is not a problem for 
fourteen bit raw files. There are so many shades that the shades easily 
cover the larger color spaces. However, JPG files have a problem. To 
cover all of the color space with only eight bits, the shades must be 
spread farther apart. This makes posterization much more likely -- 
especially if a significant amount of image editing is used (remember, 
image editing can spread shades even farther apart).&lt;br /&gt;

    There are other advantages to shooting raw. For those that are 
interested, the advantages of raw are covered in detail in my three part
 article series &lt;a href="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/raw/raw.htm"&gt;Why Raw&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Choose the Best Raw Converter for the Image&lt;/h3&gt;
Most photographers convert their raw files with Camera Raw (see 
Figure 1). Most likely, this is because Camera Raw comes with Photoshop 
(the most popular image editing software).&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_centered_next"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1c_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1c_2"&gt;
Figure 1: Camera Raw&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;img height="517" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/quality-prints/quality-prints-1.jpg" width="800" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section"&gt;
However, there are other raw converters. For instance, another raw converter option is  DxO Optics Pro (See Figure 2).&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_centered"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1c_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1c_2"&gt;
Figure 2: DxO Optics Pro&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;img alt="" class="image_border" height="480" id="Placeholder" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/quality-prints/quality-prints-2.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="800" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_break"&gt;
The important point here is that  different
 raw converters have different strengths and weaknesses. What this means
 is that one raw converter might do a better job, with a specific image,
 than a different raw converter. The trick is to match the raw converter
 with the requirements of an image.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;
This is demonstrated in Figures 3 and 4. 
These figures show a crop (at 100% view) from an image that has a 
problem with chromatic aberration. These figures show the image after it
 was converted with two different raw converters. The first raw 
conversion has a problem with the chromatic aberration. The second 
conversion shows no chromatic aberration. To be fair, the first raw 
converter does have controls that can be used to reduce the chromatic 
aberration. The problem is that the image has different colors of 
chromatic aberration in different areas of the image. Correcting one 
color of chromatic aberration caused the chromatic aberration of another
 color to become worse. Clearly, the second raw converter is preferable 
for this image. On the other hand, the first raw converter has been used
 with other images because it did a better conversion, with those 
images, than the second raw converter&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_centered"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_2lc_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_2lc_2"&gt;

        &lt;div class="image_2lc_3"&gt;

          &lt;div class="image_2lc_4"&gt;
Figure 3: Raw Converter #1&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_2lc_6"&gt;

          &lt;div class="image_2lc_7"&gt;
Figure 4: Raw Converter #2&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_2lc_2"&gt;

        &lt;div class="image_2lc_3"&gt;

          &lt;div class="image_2lc_5"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" class="image_border" height="400" id="Placeholoder" name="Placeholoder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/quality-prints/quality-prints-3.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="233" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_2lc_6"&gt;

          &lt;div class="image_2lc_8"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" class="image_border" height="400" id="Placeholder2" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/quality-prints/quality-prints-4.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="233" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section"&gt;

     The point should be clear, choosing a raw converter based on the
 requirements of an image produces superior image quality. To determine 
which raw converter is best for an image, the image can be converted 
with each raw converter. Then, an examination of the conversions will 
reveal which converter will work best.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Edit in the Raw Converter&lt;/h3&gt;
As much of the editing as possible should be done in the raw 
converter. This is because edits in a raw converter do not degrade image
 detail. Conversely, edits in image editing programs, like Photoshop, do
 degrade image detail. The reason for this is that raw converters work 
with analogue data. On the other hand, tools within image editing 
programs work with digital data. The issue here is that  edits with 
analogue data do not degrade image detail while edits with digital data 
do degrade detail  due to quantization error (for a more detailed 
explanation, see &lt;a href="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/nondestructive-3/nondestructive-3.html"&gt;Nondestructive Editing -- Part III&lt;/a&gt;).&lt;br /&gt;

    This can be seen in Figures 5 and 6. Figure 5 shows an image histogram after the image was edited in a raw converter. &lt;span class="section_break"&gt;The important point here is that the histogram is very smooth. This indicates that there has been no image degradation&lt;/span&gt;.
 Figure 6 shows the histogram after a similar edit was performed, on the
 same image,  in Photoshop. The gaps and spikes clearly show that the 
image has been degraded after the edit was performed.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_centered_break"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_2lc_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_2lc_2"&gt;

        &lt;div class="image_2lc_3"&gt;

          &lt;div class="image_2lc_4"&gt;
Figure 5: Edit with Raw Converter&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_2lc_6"&gt;

          &lt;div class="image_2lc_7"&gt;
Figure 6: Edit with Photoshop&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_2lc_2"&gt;

        &lt;div class="image_2lc_3"&gt;

          &lt;div class="image_2lc_5"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" class="image_border" height="115" id="Placeholoder2" name="Placeholoder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/quality-prints/quality-prints-5.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="210" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_2lc_6"&gt;

          &lt;div class="image_2lc_8"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" class="image_border" height="115" id="Placeholder3" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/quality-prints/quality-prints-6.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="210" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;
The lesson should be obvious -- editing in a raw converter produces superior image quality.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Use Nondestructive Editing&lt;/h3&gt;
There are two types of edits:&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Destructive Edits: Destructive edits change the original image data.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Nondestructive Edits: Nondestructive edits do not change the original data.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
For those edits that can not be  performed in a raw converter, nondestructive editing should be used.&lt;br /&gt;

    There are many types of nondestructive edits. Some of the more common are:&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Separate image layers&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Neutral layers&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Adjustment layers&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt; Smart Objects&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Smart Object transformations&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Smart Object Filters&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Raw converter (which is a special case of nondestructive editing)&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
Nondestructive edits have three main advantages over destructive edits:&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Preservation of the original data&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Flexibility&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Image Quality&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
For this article, the most important advantage is image quality. 
Now, there are a number of ways that nondestructive editing improves 
image quality. While the details of how nondestructive editing creates 
better image quality are beyond the scope of this article, the end 
result is that images that are edited with nondestructive edits will 
have less loss of image detail than images that are edited with 
destructive edits (for a more detailed investigation of nondestructive 
editing, see &lt;a href="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/nondestructive-1/nondestructive.html"&gt;Nondestructive Editing)&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

    Now, there is one point that needs to be addressed with respect 
to nondestructive editing. Many people think that nondestructive edits 
do not degrade image detail at all. This is incorrect. With the 
exception of raw converters, nondestructive edits do cause some image 
degradation. To better understand this, it is important to remember the 
definition of nondestructive edits: &lt;span class="section_next"&gt;Nondestructive
 edits do not change the original data. The definition does not state 
that nondestructive edits do not degrade image detail. This is clearly 
demonstrated by referring back to Figure 6. This figure shows a 
histogram after an image was edited with an adjustment layer -- which is
 a nondestructive edit.&lt;/span&gt; The gaps and spikes in the histogram 
clearly show that some image degradation has occurred even thought the 
edit was nondestructive.&lt;br /&gt;

    So, why use nondestructive edits if they produce some image 
degradation? The reason is that, while nondestructive edits do produce 
some image degradation, they produce less image degradation than 
destructive edits.&lt;br /&gt;

    So, when editing images, these rules should be followed in order to produce the highest quality images:&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Edit in a raw converter whenever possible since edits in a raw converter do not degrade image detail.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Edits that can not be performed in a raw converter should be done with nondestructive editing.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Destructive edits should be avoided at all costs since they create the greatest amount of image degradation.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_next"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Select the Best Interpolation Method&lt;/h3&gt;
One of the last steps before printing is to interpolate the image
 to its final size. Now, there are many interpolation methods available.
 Photoshop has several methods. In addition, there are interpolation 
software packages that can be purchased that have additional 
interpolation algorithms (for a detailed evaluation of several 
interpolation methods, see &lt;a href="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/interpolation/interpolation.htm"&gt;Interpolation&lt;/a&gt;).&lt;br /&gt;

    The main conclusion that I have drawn is that, for linear 
interpolations of around 200% or smaller, there is not a clear winner 
between Bicubic Smoother (a Photoshop method), stairstep interpolation 
(a method done in Photoshop using Bicubic), and the commercial  
interpolation methods that I have tested. What is obvious is that, for 
any specific image, one interpolation method may produce better results 
than another interpolation. Thus, in order to produce the best print 
quality for a specific image, it is necessary to select the 
interpolation method that best suits the requirements of that  image. 
This is demonstrated in Figures 7 and 8.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1rs_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rs_2"&gt;
Figure 7: Bicubic Smoother interpolation Works Best for this Image&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="400" id="Placeholder4" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/quality-prints/quality-prints-7.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="267" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Figure 7 shows an image that was originally interpolated using 
stairstep interpolation. However, this interpolation method resulted in 
halos around the very dark edges of the plant. Switching to Bicubic 
Smoother interpolation eliminated these halos and resulted in a 
significantly superior quality image.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_break"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 8: Stairstep Interpolation Works Best for this Image&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="266" id="Placeholder5" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/quality-prints/quality-prints-8.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
On the other hand, Figure 8 shows an image where the stairstep 
interpolation method produced superior results. The stairstep 
interpolation  resulted in better image detail that required 
considerably less sharpening than when the Bicubic Smoother 
interpolation was used.&lt;br /&gt;

    The only way to know which interpolation method will produce the 
best results for an image is to interpolate the image with different 
interpolation methods and see which one works best. &lt;br /&gt;

    On a side note, for linear interpolations of around 200% or less,
 I use either  Bicubic Smoother or stairstep interpolation since they 
can be done in Photoshop without the necessity of purchasing any 
additional software. In addition, they  appear to me to produce results 
as good, at this interpolation level, as the methods that require the 
purchase of separate software.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_next"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Select the Best Printing Resolution&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 9: Image Size&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="358" id="Placeholder6" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/quality-prints/quality-prints-9.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="412" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
One step that affects image quality that is often missed is 
optimizing the printing resolution. The printing resolution is the 
number of pixels per inch (PPI) at which an image will be printed. In 
Photoshop, this is set in the Image Size dialogue box (see Figure 9).&lt;br /&gt;

    There are actually a number of factors that help determine which 
PPI will produce the best print for a particular image (for more 
information on printing resolution, see &lt;a href="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/printing-resolution/printing-resolution.html"&gt;Optimizing Printing Resolution&lt;/a&gt;).
 Furthermore, a PPI that works best for one image may not be the best 
choice for another image. In other words, the printing resolution needs 
to be individually selected for each image. This can be seen be looking 
back at Figures 7 and 8. The image in Figure 7 printed best at 360 PPI 
while the image in Figure 8 printed best at 300 PPI even though both 
prints were made on the same printer.&lt;br /&gt;

    What this means is that, for a particular image, separate prints 
need to be made, each at a different PPI,  in order to determine which 
PPI will produce the best print. This means that multiple interpolations
 need to be made to produce the prints at the different PPI settings.&lt;br /&gt;

    Once the prints are made, they can be examined to determine which PPI setting produces the best print.&lt;br /&gt;

    Some points should be kept  in mind when determining the best PPI setting for a print:&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Generally, the lowest printing resolution that should be 
considered is somewhere between 180 and 200 PPI. Below this printing 
resolution, image quality tends to suffer.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;In general, it rarely makes sense to use a printing resolution higher than 360 PPI.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;This provides a range of printing resolutions that should be 
considered. A photographer might print copies of the image at 200, 250, 
300, and 360 PPI.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;It is not necessary to print the entire image. A section of 
the image that has good detail can be used to produce smaller prints for
 the evaluation. This saves paper and ink. For instance, for a 24"x36" 
print, a 6"x10" section can be used to produce the test prints.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Selecting a Good Printer&lt;/h3&gt;
The last issue that needs to be dealt with is the selection of 
the printer. Obviously, the better the printer, the better the prints 
that can be made. Unfortunately, it is not so easy to just switch 
printers. A good inkjet printer can cost anywhere from hundreds to 
thousands of dollars.&lt;br /&gt;

    While good inkjet printers are costly, they affect image quality in two main ways:&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Better printers produce prints with higher resolution.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Better printers have larger gamuts. Thus, they can reproduce more colors.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
For many photographers, the color gamut of the printer is a major
 concern. Older generation printers have smaller gamuts. As a result, 
they are not capable of producing as many colors as later generation 
printers that use newer ink formulations with wider gamuts.&lt;br /&gt;

    I ran into this issue with my printer. I was unhappy with the 
printer that I was using because it was incapable of printing some of 
the more saturated colors. As a result, I was not able to get 
satisfactory results with some of my images that had fairly saturated 
colors. This was particularly true for images that I had shot in the 
spring (with spring's saturated greens) and the fall (with autumn's 
saturated reds, oranges, and yellows). Several of these images were 
among my favorites. Yet, the prints looked lackluster due to the rather 
subdued colors that resulted with my printer.&lt;br /&gt;

    After debating the issue for about a year, I finally purchased a 
new printer. The new printer can print most of the saturated colors that
 the old printer could not. In addition, the new printer has a host of 
other improved features that result in substantially improved image 
quality.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;

    Now, I am not suggesting that everyone run out and buy a new 
printer. However, every photographer should be aware that the printer 
has a major impact on the quality of the final prints. If a 
photographer's printer is not up to standards, the quality of the prints
 it produces will be sub-optimal no matter how good the camera or 
workflow that was used to create the image.&lt;br /&gt;

    In short, just as we buy new digital cameras as the technology 
evolves in order to produce higher quality images, we need to consider 
upgrading our printers every once in a while in order to get the 
superior image quality that the improved printer technology delivers.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</description><thr:total xmlns:thr="http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0">0</thr:total><author>naswarman.com.pk@gmail.com (A A)</author></item><item><title>Texture Photography -- Part 1</title><link>http://about-digital-photography-0.blogspot.com/2011/11/texture-photography-part-1.html</link><pubDate>Tue, 15 Nov 2011 03:09:00 -0800</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-2842667588749990803.post-6098302132390855561</guid><description>&lt;div dir="ltr" style="text-align: left;" trbidi="on"&gt;
&lt;div class="text_block"&gt;

    &lt;h1&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/h1&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
Article and Photography by Ron Bigelow&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 1: Texture Photography&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Texture Photography" height="300" id="Placeholder11" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/texture-photography/texture-photography-1-1.jpg" style="background-color: #990099;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
The point of any image is to draw the attention of the viewers. 
Now, there are many ways to do this. Some images depend on bold color. 
Other images utilize leading lines. Still others rely on dramatic 
scenery. However, an often overlooked  method of capturing the viewers' 
attention is the use of texture. Thus, the purpose of this article is to
 cover the fundamentals  of texture photography.&lt;br /&gt;

    Of course, the first thing that needs to be done is to define 
texture photography. For the purposes of this article, texture 
photography is any imagery that depends, at least partly, for its impact
 on the texture of the objects in the image. Texture will be defined as 
the surface detail of an object. This detail can be composed of surface 
irregularities (such as the wood grain of an old plank) or of small 
forms on a surface (such as a mass of roots from an ancient tree).&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Why Shoot Texture Photography    &lt;/h3&gt;
Perhaps, the first question that should be addressed is why shoot
 texture photography. The answer is quite simple. As photographers, we 
need to create images that have impact, and the proper utilization of 
texture can add impact to images. When used properly, texture can be 
just as powerful as bold color, leading lines, or dramatic scenery.&lt;br /&gt;

     By adding the use of texture to our skill set, we expand our 
skills and become better photographers. Thus, texture becomes another 
tool that is available in our skill set that can be drawn on at any 
time.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Types of Texture Photography
    &lt;/h3&gt;
There are three primary types of texture photography that will be covered in this article: detail, drama, and information.&lt;br /&gt;

    
    
  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rs_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rs_2"&gt;
&lt;span class="image_1rl_2"&gt;Figure 2:&lt;a href="http://ronbigelow.com/temp/Texture%20Photography%20--%20Partial%20Image"&gt; Texture for Detail&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt=" Texture Photography Detail" height="400" id="Placeholder" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/texture-photography/texture-photography-1-2.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="300" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Detail:&lt;/span&gt; With this type of 
texture photography, the detail in the surface of the object being 
photographed is the most important aspect of an image. The actual object
 is of lesser importance. When this technique is used, the image is 
often shot as a macro shot in order to move in very close to emphasize 
the detail or as a partial object shot where only a portion of the 
object is photographed (see Figure 2).&lt;br /&gt;

    For a good detail image, it is important to select a proper 
subject. The best subjects will have either strong tonal or color 
contrast as the contrast enhances the detail of the texture. Without 
this contrast, the detail will not show very well, and the image will 
suffer as a result.&lt;br /&gt;

    Another thing to pay attention too is the light. Often, the best 
light for this type of image is side light. Side light will bring out 
the detail in any uneven surface by casting shadows.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 3: Texture for Drama&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Texture Photography Drama" height="267" id="Placeholder4" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/texture-photography/texture-photography-1-3.jpg" style="background-color: #990099;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Drama:&lt;/span&gt; With this second 
approach to texture photography, the texture is used to add drama to an 
image (see Figure 3). Here, the texture is not necessarily the most 
important aspect of an image. Rather, it is one component of the image 
that serves to spice up the image.&lt;br /&gt;

    Generally, the contrast or color of the texture serves to capture
 the viewer's attention. As is the case in Figure 3, the texture can 
also serve to direct the viewer's eye by the use of curves that the 
viewer's eye tends to naturally follow.&lt;br /&gt;

    As was mentioned above for detail texture images, it is important
 to select subject matter that has tonal or color contrast. In addition,
 side light also tends to work well with drama texture images as it 
helps to bring out the texture -- thus enhancing the drama.&lt;br /&gt;

    One more thing to look for in this type of image is that the 
texture must work in harmony with the overall image. For instance, the 
texture of some foreground rock may work harmoniously with the rest of 
an image of a large canyon. However, the texture of some old curtains 
(in the background) may not work well with an image of some fine, 
crystal glasses.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_break"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 4: Texture for Information&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Texture Photography Information" height="267" id="Placeholder2" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/texture-photography/texture-photography-1-4.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Information:&lt;/span&gt; The third type
 of texture photography uses texture to help communicate information 
about an image. This can be seen in Figure 4. This is the window of the 
mortician's shop in an old ghost town. The old wood of the window frame,
 as well as the aged wood of the wagon (reflected in the window), 
clearly communicate that this is an old structure.&lt;br /&gt;

    For information texture images, it is important to identify 
exactly what information the texture is to communicate and compose the 
image in such a way that the texture brings out the proper message.&lt;br /&gt;

    One other important point is to make sure that the texture serves
 a subservient role in this type of image. In other words, the texture 
should help to enhance the center of interest of the image by adding 
information to the center of interest. The texture should not overwhelm 
the center of interest.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_next"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Composition&lt;/h3&gt;
The general composition rules apply to texture photography just 
as they do other fields of photography (for a comprehensive article 
series on composition, see &lt;a href="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/adv_comp/adv_comp.htm"&gt;Advanced Composition&lt;/a&gt;).
 However, three aspects of composition tend to be particularly important
 in texture photography: contrast, curves, and patterns.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
&lt;span class="image_1ls_2"&gt;Figure 5: Composition -- Contrast within Texture&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Texture photography Contrast Within Texture" height="267" id="Placeholder3" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/texture-photography/texture-photography-1-5.jpg" style="background-color: #990099;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Contrast:&lt;/span&gt; Contrast comes in two forms: tonal contrast and color contrast. Either one works well for texture photography.&lt;br /&gt;

    Now, there are a couple of ways that contrast can be used. The 
first way is within the texture itself. As already mentioned above, 
contrast enhances the detail in texture and makes it stand out. This can
 be seen in Figure 5. The color contrast of the white, yellow, brown, 
and green on the leaf makes the leaf detail more noticeable. In 
addition, the tonal contrast of the wood grain makes the texture of the 
wood stand out.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_break"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1rs_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rs_2"&gt;
Figure 6: Composition -- Contrast with background&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Texture Photography Contrast with Background" height="400" id="Placeholder5" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/texture-photography/texture-photography-1-6.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="266" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
The other way that contrast can be used is to make an area of texture 
contrast with the background. This draws a viewer's attention to the 
area and makes it stand out. This is shown in Figure 6. In this image, 
the leaf sharply contrasts with the background. This draws the eye to 
the area of texture at the front of the leaf.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Curves:&lt;/span&gt; Texture can often 
take the form of curves. When this is the case, the curves tend to fall 
into one of two categories: leading curves and non-leading curves.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 7: Leading Curves&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Texture Photography Leading Curves" height="267" id="Placeholder6" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/texture-photography/texture-photography-1-7.jpg" style="background-color: #990099;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Leading curves serve to lead a viewer's eye. Specifically, they 
lead the viewer's eye to the center of interest. This strengthens the 
center of interest. As a result, leading curves can be very successful 
in increasing the effectiveness of an image. The use of leading curves 
can be seen in Figure 7. The curves lead the eye to the bush (which 
serves as the center of interest in this image).&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 8: Non-Leading Curves&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Texture Photography Non-Leading Curves" height="267" id="Placeholder7" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/texture-photography/texture-photography-1-8.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Non-leading curves do not lead a viewer's eye to the center of 
interest. Instead, they serve to add some type of feeling or information
 to an image. This is demonstrated in Figure 8. The curves do not lead 
anywhere. Instead, they serve to add a sense of the dramatic to the 
image.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_break"&gt;

    When using curves, it is very important to be aware that curves 
add emotional content to an image by affecting the mood of the image. 
Vertical lines can communicate moods of: stability, peace, or power. 
Horizontal lines tend to communicate a feeling of permanence or lack of 
change. Diagonal lines are best at making an image more dynamic or 
communicating a sense of action (for a much more detailed coverage of 
the use of curves to communicate mood, please see &lt;a href="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/adv_comp/adv_comp.htm"&gt;Advanced Composition&lt;/a&gt;).&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 9: Vertical Curves&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Texture Photography Vertical Curves" height="267" id="Placeholder8" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/texture-photography/texture-photography-1-9.jpg" style="background-color: #990099;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Consequently, it is very important to use curves that work in 
harmony with the rest of an image to communicate the main point of the 
image. For instance, Figure 9 shows the image of the ghost town again. 
Some of the strongest curves in this image (the  lines/curves formed by 
the grain of the wood post at the right of the image) are vertical. They
 help to communicate a sense of stability in this image. In other words,
 this ghost town building has clearly been around a long time, and it 
isn't going to change much anytime in the near future. The vertical 
curves help to communicate this message.&lt;br /&gt;

    On the other hand, had strong diagonal curves been used in the 
image, the curves would have added a sense of the dynamic to the image. 
This would have contradicted the rest of the image. The result would 
have been a weakened image.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1rs_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rs_2"&gt;
Figure 10: Diagonal Curves&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Texture Photography Diagonal Curves" height="400" id="Placeholder9" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/texture-photography/texture-photography-1-10.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="267" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Figure 10 shows an example of an image that benefits from the use of 
diagonal curves. In this image, the diagonal curves help to communicate 
the graceful and dynamic nature of the sand dunes.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_break"&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Patterns:&lt;/span&gt; Patterns are 
frequently very effective at catching people's attention. However, when 
used in photographs, simple patterns by themselves often don't hold the 
attention for very long. Therefore, it is necessary to be a little more 
sophisticated with the use of patterns when creating texture images. 
There are a couple of ways that patterns in textures can be made more 
effective: multiple patterns and breaking the pattern.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 11: Multiple Patterns&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Texture Photography Multiple Patterns" height="267" id="Placeholder10" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/texture-photography/texture-photography-1-11.jpg" style="background-color: #990099;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
When using multiple patterns, two or more patterns, that 
reinforce each other, are used. Figure 11 shows a use of multiple 
patterns. Here, the texture pattern of the center of the flower is 
matched with the texture pattern of the pedals.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1rs_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rs_2"&gt;
Figure 12: Breaking the Pattern&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Texture Photography Breaking the Pattern" height="400" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/texture-photography/texture-photography-1-12.jpg" width="267" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
The other option is to break the texture pattern. This is usually done
 by inserting an object into the pattern (see Figure 12). The inserted 
object should be carefully placed in such a manner that it enhances the 
composition. Often, following the rule of thirds (or a similar 
composition rule) in placing the object will give excellent results.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;h3&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</description><thr:total xmlns:thr="http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0">0</thr:total><author>naswarman.com.pk@gmail.com (A A)</author></item><item><title>Texture Photography -- Part 2</title><link>http://about-digital-photography-0.blogspot.com/2011/11/texture-photography-part-2.html</link><pubDate>Tue, 15 Nov 2011 03:09:00 -0800</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-2842667588749990803.post-4715909938947852751</guid><description>&lt;div dir="ltr" style="text-align: left;" trbidi="on"&gt;
&lt;div class="text_block"&gt;

    &lt;h1&gt;
Texture Photography -- Part 2&lt;/h1&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
Article and Photography by Ron Bigelow&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new"&gt;

    Part 1 of this series covered the fundamentals of texture 
photography. Parts 2 and 3 will apply the concepts of texture 
photography to various subject matter.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Buildings&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rs_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rs_2"&gt;
&lt;span class="image_1rl_2"&gt;Figure 1:&lt;a href="http://ronbigelow.com/temp/Texture%20Photography%20--%20Partial%20Image"&gt; Building&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt=" Texture Photography Buildings" height="267" id="Placeholder" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/texture-photography-2/texture-photography-2-1.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Buildings are a rich source of opportunities for texture photography. This is especially true for old buildings.&lt;br /&gt;

    
    
    When photographing buildings, there are a couple of ways to 
approach the subject: photographing part of the building or 
photographing the entire building.&lt;br /&gt;

    When a part of a building is photographed, the camera is 
generally moved in close to isolate an interesting section of the 
building. So, it is necessary to start by identifying an interesting 
component of the building that will serve as the center of interest of 
the image. Most likely, this will be an object that has an interesting 
form. In addition, due to the camera being so close to the building, the
 texture will be a dominant characteristic of the image. Thus, it is 
critical that the texture also be interesting. Last, the light is 
important. Side light will usually be best as it will enhance the center
 of interest and the texture.&lt;br /&gt;

    When an entire building is photographed, the situation changes. 
The texture will now be in a supporting role. It is still important to 
have good texture, but the shape and character of the building are the 
most important factors. Thus, it is crucial that the building be 
selected carefully and that the image be well composed.&lt;br /&gt;

    As far as light is concerned, early morning or late afternoon light will tend to add personality to a building.&lt;br /&gt;

    Last, the surrounding environment can be very important in this 
type of image. The environment can add information to an image that 
helps  tell the story of the building.&lt;br /&gt;

    Last, don't forget the sky. A colorless, featureless sky can ruin
 an otherwise interesting building shot. Look for either some clouds or 
some color that contrasts with the building to help make the building 
stand out.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_next"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Rock&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 2: Rock&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Texture Photography Rock" height="300" id="Placeholder4" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/texture-photography-2/texture-photography-2-2.jpg" style="background-color: #990099;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Rock formations can be used to create great texture images. Of 
course, when selecting a rock formation for a texture image, the texture
 is going to be a primary concern. However, there are a few other things
 that should be considered: rock form, rock color, and curves.&lt;br /&gt;

    The forms that are created by the various pieces of rock can help
 define the character of an image. For example, smooth rock will help to
 create a feeling of calm while jagged rock will create a feeling of 
tension or unease. So, the forms of the rock must work harmoniously with
 the rest of the image to create the emotion the photographer wishes to 
instill in a viewer.&lt;br /&gt;

    The color of the rock can add richness to an image. So, if the 
rock has a strong color, it is usually best to capitalize on it. This 
can be done in a couple of ways. First, a polarizer can often be used to
 enhance the color. Second, the light for the image should be chosen 
carefully. This generally means that these types of images should either
 be shot during the &lt;a href="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/magic/magic.htm"&gt;magic hour&lt;/a&gt; (half hour after sunrise or half hour before sunset) or with &lt;a href="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/reflected-light/reflected-light.htm"&gt;reflected light&lt;/a&gt;. Either of these types of light will likely help to enhance the saturation  of the rock.&lt;br /&gt;

    Curves in rock can be used to add impact to an image. However, as
 mentioned in Part 1 of this article series, it is important to remember
 that curves add emotional content to an image (for more information, 
see &lt;a href="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/adv_comp/adv_comp.htm"&gt;Advanced Composition&lt;/a&gt;).
 For instance, graceful curves add a sense of elegance, horizontal 
curves create a feeling of stability, and jagged curves create an 
uncomfortable atmosphere. So, the curves must match the overall mood 
that the image is to project.&lt;br /&gt;

    A couple of final points should be remembered. First, don't 
forget to consider having a strong center of interest to draw a viewer's
 attention. Second, if there is a background (such as a sky), it is 
usually best to choose a background that contrasts with the rock in 
order to accentuate the rock formation.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Logs&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rs_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rs_2"&gt;
Figure 3: Log&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Texture Photograhy Logs" height="400" id="Placeholder2" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/texture-photography-2/texture-photography-2-3.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="267" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;

    Logs are one of the easiest objects to use for creating texture 
images. This is because they have two characteristics that lend 
themselves to texture photography: contrast and curves.&lt;br /&gt;

    The first thing to look for when scouting out logs for texture 
photography is the contrast. It is necessary to start with a log that 
has enough contrast to grab a viewer's attention. This usually means 
that a log must have a grain that has contrast. The second thing to look
 for is a set of curves. These can be either leading or non-leading 
curves. The important thing is that the curves add to the image in some 
way.&lt;br /&gt;

    An image of a log can frequently be enhanced by including  
something from the environment that surrounds the log. The most likely 
objects for this will be flowers or vegetation.&lt;br /&gt;

    Often, side light works well to help emphasis the contrast in the
 grain. However, side light is not always necessary. This is 
particularly true if some drama can be added to an image in some other 
way. For instance, when old logs get wet, the wood can sometimes become 
darker and take on a more moody feel. This works great for texture 
photography. In addition, when objects (such as the flowers or 
vegetation already mentioned) contrast in tone or color with the wood, 
this may add all the drama that is needed.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_next"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Plants&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ls_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ls_2"&gt;
Figure 4: Plants&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Texture Photogrpahy Plants" height="400" id="Placeholder3" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/texture-photography-2/texture-photography-2-4.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="267" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Plants are great for texture photography because they are 
everywhere. That means that you don't need to travel someplace to get 
some great shots. All you have to do is visit your backyard.&lt;br /&gt;

    There are so many characteristics of plants that can be used to 
create interesting texture images. Of course, the first thing to look 
for is good texture. This is usually pretty easy to find in a garden. 
However, you don't want to stop there. After some plants that have good 
texture have been found, you should look for other aspects of the plants
 that can be used to create an even better image.&lt;br /&gt;

    One of the things for which one should look is any interesting 
curves. Often, this comes in the form of curves formed by the edges of 
leaves or curves that result from plant stems. The next thing that 
should be considered is color. Color demands a viewer's attention. Thus,
 the more saturated the color, the more interested people will likely be
 in an image. Even better than color is contrasting color. Contrasting 
color can really make an image come alive.&lt;br /&gt;

    The best light for plant photography is usually a diffuse light. 
That means that great plant shots can be captured on overcast days or 
early/late in the day when the garden is in shadow.&lt;br /&gt;

    The seasons play an important part in plant photography. Spring 
produces beautiful, lush greens. Autumn can produce stunning fall colors
 (depending on where you live). Unfortunately, summer and winter are 
less ideal for plant photography as the plants are less vibrant at that 
time.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    
    &lt;h3&gt;
Trees&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 5: Trees&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Texture Photogrpahy Trees" height="267" id="Placeholder5" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/texture-photography-2/texture-photography-2-5.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Trees provide a rich variety of texture photography 
opportunities. Great texture images can be created from the leaves, 
bark, or roots.
    When using the leaves as texture photography subject matter, the 
guidelines pretty much follow those covered in the Plants section 
directly above. In other words, one should look for interesting curves, 
color, and color contrast. Furthermore, the best light is often produced
 by overcast conditions that create a soft, diffuse light.&lt;br /&gt;

    The bark of trees often has great texture. Furthermore, the 
texture commonly forms an irregular pattern. This can create some great 
subject matter for texture photography. Of course, in this case, it is 
necessary to move in close enough to concentrate on the bark. However, 
there is one problem that can occur when photographing the bark. As 
mentioned in Part 1 of this series, while patterns can often capture a 
viewer's interest, simple patterns can sometimes fail to hold that 
interest for very long. Consequently, it is best to figure out a way to 
add some interest to the pattern. This is often fairly easy with tree 
bark. All that may be necessary is to break the pattern. This can be 
done by finding some irregularity in the bark (such as a knot).&lt;br /&gt;

    With some trees, roots can be the most interesting part of the 
tree for texture photography. This is because of the interesting 
patterns that roots can form. The key here is to find a tree with 
exposed roots. These roots can form jagged, irregular curves that can 
add a sinister or menacing mood to an image. Side light may help to 
strengthen this mood. However, this sinister/menacing mood can sometimes
 be captured even with diffuse light.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_next"&gt;

    
    &lt;h3&gt;
Insects&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ls_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ls_2"&gt;
Figure 6: Insects&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Texture Photography Insects" height="400" id="Placeholder6" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/texture-photography-2/texture-photography-2-6.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="267" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Another opportunity for texture photography is to photograph 
insects. There are a couple of different ways that insects can be used 
for texture photography: macro shots and non-macro shots.
    Obviously, for macro shots, the camera must be moved in very 
close to the insect. This allows one to photography the texture of the 
insect. This texture can take many forms. For some insects, the texture 
can be almost grotesque as the insects appear  as tiny monsters. For 
other insects, the texture can take on beautiful patterns. For instance,
 this is the case with butterfly's and some beetles.&lt;br /&gt;

    For macro shots of insects, macro equipment will be needed. A 
detailed explanation of macro equipment and techniques is beyond the 
scope of this article. The only comment that will be made is that 
ordinary sunlight will likely not be sufficient for this type of 
photography. Some macro flash capability will be required.&lt;br /&gt;

    However, a lack of macro equipment is no reason to miss out on 
insect photography. Great insect images can be captured without a macro 
lens. It is just necessary to back up a little bit. For non-macro insect
 shots, the best results can often be captured by showing the insects 
within their environment. In fact, for non-macro shots, most of the 
texture may come from the environment rather than the insects.&lt;br /&gt;

    The best light for this type of image varies from one situation 
to another. So, it will be necessary to use a little bit of judgment to 
select the best light for each shot.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</description><thr:total xmlns:thr="http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0">0</thr:total><author>naswarman.com.pk@gmail.com (A A)</author></item><item><title>Texture Photography -- Part 3</title><link>http://about-digital-photography-0.blogspot.com/2011/11/texture-photography-part-3.html</link><pubDate>Tue, 15 Nov 2011 03:08:00 -0800</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-2842667588749990803.post-7047027352381571620</guid><description>&lt;div dir="ltr" style="text-align: left;" trbidi="on"&gt;
&lt;div class="text_block"&gt;

    &lt;h1&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/h1&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
Article and Photography by Ron Bigelow&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new"&gt;

    This article will wind up this three part series on texture 
photography by applying the concepts of texture photography to three, 
additional types of subject matter.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Beach&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rs_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rs_2"&gt;
&lt;span class="image_1rl_2"&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;a href="http://ronbigelow.com/temp/Texture%20Photography%20--%20Partial%20Image"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt=" Texture Photography Beach" height="267" id="Placeholder" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/texture-photography-3/texture-photography-3-1.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
For those that are lucky enough to live by the beach, there are 
many texture photography opportunities waiting. Three of the primary 
opportunities at the beach are: rock, driftwood, and sand.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Rock:&lt;/span&gt; Not all beaches have 
rock. Some are miles of smooth sand. However, when a beach does have 
rock, the rock often has very interesting texture. Some of the best 
photo opportunities can be found with rock that is submerged at high 
tide but uncovered at low tide. This type of rock is heavily worn by 
wave action. The softer parts of the rock have been eroded away while 
the harder rock is left.&lt;br /&gt;

    The key is to find interesting patterns in the rock texture and 
emphasize that in the photos. The timing for this type of photography is
 bit of a pain. Obviously, these shots need to be taken at low tide. In 
addition, the sun should be low on the horizon in order to emphasize the
 rock texture. Consequently, it is necessary to check both the tide 
tables and the sun rising and setting times.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Driftwood:&lt;/span&gt; Driftwood can 
make some incredible images. The wood has a grain which has been eroded 
by the wave action. This can provide great texture. In addition, the 
wood will likely be wet which can further enhance the contrast of the 
texture.&lt;br /&gt;

    As with much of texture photography, side light works well with 
driftwood. One of the nice things about driftwood is that it can be 
repositioned to take advantage of the sidelight.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Wet Sand:&lt;/span&gt; Due to wave  
action, the sand will have patterns. It is just a matter of finding some
 interesting ones. Usually, the best opportunities can be found at low 
tide. If the sand doesn't show any interesting patterns, just wait until
 after the next wave and look again.&lt;br /&gt;

    Photographing the sand during a colorful sunset can add intense, saturated color to the sand for even better images.&lt;br /&gt;

    While at the beach, don't make the mistake a photographer friend 
of mine made. He set his camera on a tripod and turned his back to the 
ocean for a few moments. When he turned back, he discovered his camera 
equipment had been washed into the ocean by an unexpectedly large wave.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_next"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Desert&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 2: Desert&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Texture Photography Desert" height="300" id="Placeholder4" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/texture-photography-3/texture-photography-3-2.jpg" style="background-color: #990099;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
When looking to capture texture images, the desert is a prime 
location. Texture can be found in the plants, animals, and rock of the 
desert.&lt;br /&gt;

    Rock is probably the easiest to photograph. Rock with bands of 
alternating color works well as texture photography subject matter. This
 type of image is best shot in the late afternoon. However, if there are
 surrounding mountains, one can not shoot too late or the rock will be 
cast in shadow after the sun disappears behind the mountains. 
Consequently, the best light usually occurs when the sun sits just above
 the mountains. This will give the warmest light and the longest 
shadows.&lt;br /&gt;

    Also, it is best to have a contrasting sky. Often, the deepest 
blues in the sky can be found opposite the direction of the sun. This is
 due to Mie scattering which adds white light to the sky (thus, 
desaturating the sky). The closer to the sun an area of sky is, the 
greater the Mie scattering.&lt;br /&gt;

    One last point, don't forget to try a polarizer. A polarizer can 
often help to saturate the color of the rock and the sky. However, the 
affect of a polarizer varies depending on the angle of the lens with 
respect to the direction of the light. Polarizers are most effective 
when the lens is perpendicular with respect to the sunlight. This should
 be taken into account when positioning the camera for a shot.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Animals&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 3: Animals&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Texture Photography Animals" height="267" id="Placeholder2" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/texture-photography-3/texture-photography-3-3.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Animals can also provide some texture photography opportunities. 
Often, the animal's fur, feathers, or scales provide the texture.&lt;br /&gt;

    Wildlife photography is such a broad category of photography that
 it is difficult to give specifics for photographing animals -- 
especially in a short article. Instead, it is hoped that this will help 
you  generate some of your own ideas for wildlife, texture images.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;h3&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</description><thr:total xmlns:thr="http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0">0</thr:total><author>naswarman.com.pk@gmail.com (A A)</author></item><item><title>Abstract Photography</title><link>http://about-digital-photography-0.blogspot.com/2011/11/abstract-photography_7870.html</link><pubDate>Tue, 15 Nov 2011 03:08:00 -0800</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-2842667588749990803.post-7602533365743720768</guid><description>&lt;div dir="ltr" style="text-align: left;" trbidi="on"&gt;
&lt;div class="text_block"&gt;

    &lt;h1&gt;
Abstract Photography&lt;/h1&gt;
&lt;h1&gt;
Part I&lt;/h1&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
Article and Photography by Ron Bigelow&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1ls_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ls_2"&gt;
Figure 1: Abstract Photography&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="400" id="Placeholder9" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography/abstract-photography-1-1.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="267" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div align="left"&gt;
Abstract photography can produce very dramatic 
images. It relies on our more primal sense of form, color, and curves 
than it does on detail. The problem is that most photographers tend to 
think in terms of detail when evaluating photographic opportunities. 
However, it takes a different way of looking at our world to  perceive 
the abstract photography opportunities that surround us.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div align="left"&gt;
The purpose of this article is to investigate the  
techniques and subject matter opportunities of abstract photography. 
This is an in-depth, multi article series that will cover the following 
topics:&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_centered"&gt;

  
    &lt;div class="image_2lc_1"&gt;

      
      &lt;div class="image_2lc_2"&gt;

        &lt;h3 align="left"&gt;
Contents&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_2lc_3"&gt;

          &lt;div class="image_2lc_5"&gt;

            &lt;ul&gt;&lt;div align="center"&gt;
Definition&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div align="center"&gt;
Why Abstract&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div align="center"&gt;
Essentials&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div align="center"&gt;
Composition&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div align="center"&gt;
Art of Subtraction&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div align="center"&gt;
Techniques&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div align="center"&gt;
Flowers&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_2lc_6"&gt;

          &lt;div class="image_2lc_8"&gt;

            &lt;ul&gt;&lt;div align="center"&gt;
DVD&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div align="center"&gt;
Sand Dunes&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div align="center"&gt;
Buildings&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div align="center"&gt;
Rock&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div align="center"&gt;
Around the House&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div align="center"&gt;
Water&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Abstract Photography Definition&lt;/h3&gt;
There is no standard, universally accepted definition of abstract
 photography. Actually, it is not easy to create a clear-cut definition 
of an abstract concept. However, for the purposes of this article 
series, it is necessary to create a definition in order to put some 
boundaries around the topic. This makes it easier to determine what 
falls within the domain of the subject matter. Thus, for this article 
series, abstract photography will be defined as photography that:&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Does not represent the subject in a literal way.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Communicates primarily through form, color, and curves rather than image detail.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;

    This definition brings about a very important point. Since image 
detail takes a back seat to form, color, and curves, the brain's logical
 processes are more subdued when viewing abstract images.   Instead, the
 reaction is much more instinctual. In essence, abstract photography 
communicates to the viewer primarily through the viewer's emotions. This
 plays to the photographer's benefit because humans' emotional systems 
are much more powerful than the logical systems.&lt;br /&gt;

    Furthermore, the emphasis on form, color,  and curves tends to 
elicit strong reactions from the human perceptual system. This is not 
just a psychological matter. It is actually hard wired into the human 
neurological and mental systems. For instance, the human visual system 
responds very strongly to certain colors and color contrast. In 
addition, certain parts of the brain are programmed to respond to curves
 and shapes.&lt;br /&gt;

    This fits in perfectly with abstract photography. When done well,
 abstract photography can be very much in tune with the human 
perceptual, mental, and emotional systems. The end result can be very 
powerful images.&lt;br /&gt;

    It is important to notice that the definition did not say that 
the subject matter had to be unrecognizable. It is true that, in some 
abstract images, the viewer can not tell what has been photographed. 
However, that is just one type of abstract image.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Why Abstract Photography&lt;/h3&gt;
The question arises, "Why bother creating abstract images?" In 
other words, there are a lot of other photographic opportunities out 
there. Why would a photographer choose to create abstract images?&lt;br /&gt;

    There are a couple of reasons. First, as just mentioned, abstract
 images can be very powerful. That in itself is all the justification 
that is needed. However, there is a second advantage. Abstract images 
can be created almost anywhere. What that means is that a photographer 
can create abstract images right at home and in the surrounding 
neighborhood. This is in contrast to other types of photography, such as
 landscape photography, where there is the cost in time and money to 
travel to specific locations to capture images.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Essentials&lt;/h3&gt;
There are three essentials to abstract photography: form, color, 
 and curves. It is paramount that an abstract photographer learns to 
think in these terms.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1rs_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rs_2"&gt;
Figure 2: Form&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="400" id="Placeholder3" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography/abstract-photography-1-2.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="267" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Form:&lt;/span&gt; Form refers to the 
shape of the objects in an image. Form serves as the framework upon 
which an abstract image is created. Basically, form creates the core of 
an image while color and curves add enhancements. Therefore, it is 
crucial that an abstract image start off with good form. This is done by
 choosing objects that have pleasing, interesting, or dynamic shapes.&lt;br /&gt;

    Now, it might be tempting to want a definition or list of what 
makes for good form. However, it must be remembered that abstract 
photography is an instinctual art form -- people react to it emotionally
 not logically. Thus, it is essential that form be  approached in the 
same manner. It is necessary to find objects with forms that create an 
emotional reaction. When one looks at an object and immediately reacts, 
"Wow, look at that", a strong form has probably been found.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;br /&gt;

        &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ls_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ls_2"&gt;
&lt;span class="image_1rs_2"&gt;Figure 3: Color&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="400" id="Placeholder" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography/abstract-photography-1-3.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="267" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Color:&lt;/span&gt; Color grabs the 
attention of the viewer and stimulates the viewer's perceptual system.  
 Color not only grabs the viewer's attention, it also serves to hold  
the viewer's attention for an extended period of time. If the viewer's 
eyes do wander, the color tends to bring the attention back.&lt;br /&gt;

    One way to use color is to use a saturated or intense color (see Figure 3).&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section"&gt;

  &lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 4: Color Contrast&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="166" id="Placeholder2" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography/abstract-photography-1-4.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="600" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Another method of using color that can produce very dynamic images is 
to use contrasting color. This approach is shown in Figure 4. The 
composition of this image is extremely simple. The image depends almost 
entirely on the color and tonal contrast between the sun and the dark 
clouds for its impact.  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_break"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1ls_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ls_2"&gt;
Figure 5: Curves &amp;amp; Center of Interest&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="400" id="Placeholder4" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography/abstract-photography-1-5.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="267" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Curves:&lt;/span&gt; Curves add interest to 
an abstract image. They do this by controlling the movement of the 
viewer's eyes through an image. Now, there are a couple of ways that 
curves can be used in an image. The first way that curves can add 
interest to an image is to direct the viewer's attention to an image's 
center of interest. This is shown in Figure 5. In this image, the curves
 (i.e., the edges of the pedals) point toward the colored center of the 
flower (which is the center of interest in this image). These curves 
serve to direct the viewer's attention to the colored area. This 
strengthens the center of interest and creates a stronger image.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;

    &lt;span class="section_break"&gt;The second way that curves can add 
interest to an image is a bit more intangible. With this use of curves, 
the curves do not point at the center of interest. In fact, they do not 
point at anything in particular. &lt;/span&gt;Instead, the curves simply flow 
through the image in a graceful or dynamic way. How does this help the 
image? Even though the curves do not point toward any object, they still
 serve to control the viewer's eyes. When used properly, the viewer's 
eyes will roam back and forth along the curves. Thus, the viewer's 
attention has been captured.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 6: Roaming Curves&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="267" id="Placeholder5" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography/abstract-photography-1-6.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
This use of curves can be seen in Figure 6. In this image, the 
curves do not point toward any center of interest (in fact, the image 
has no center of interest). Rather, the lines function to lead the eyes 
throughout the image with no end point in sight. The viewer's eyes 
follow the edges of the leaf as well as the veins in the leaf only to 
find that one curve simply leads to another.&lt;br /&gt;

    While this second use of curves works very well in abstract 
images,  it should be used very cautiously in images that are not 
abstract. In non-abstract images, such use of curves is often 
distracting.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Composition&lt;/h3&gt;
Composition consists of how the objects in an image are  arranged
 with respect to each other. There are many approaches to composition. 
Carrying out a thorough review of the subject of composition is beyond 
the scope of this article. However, two aspects of composition, as they 
relate to abstract photography, will be covered.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Rule of thirds&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;No rules&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 7: Rule of Thirds&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="267" id="Placeholder6" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography/abstract-photography-1-7.jpg" style="background-color: #990099;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Rule of Thirds:&lt;/span&gt; The rule of
 thirds requires that an image be divided into thirds both vertically 
and horizontally. The center of interest should be located where the 
dividing lines cross. Figure 7 shows an example of the rule of thirds. 
As can be seen, the end of the flower stem  is located where the rule of
 third lines intersect.&lt;br /&gt;
    
  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 8: No Rules&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="267" id="Placeholder7" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography/abstract-photography-1-8.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;No Rules:&lt;/span&gt; One of the great 
things about abstract photography is that it is not necessary to follow 
the rules. This is the case with composition. It is not always necessary
 to follow the rule of thirds, or any other composition rule, to create 
great abstract images. Figure 8 is an example of an image that does not 
follow the rules. As is obvious, this image does not have a center of 
interest and does not follow the rule of thirds.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Art of Subtraction&lt;/h3&gt;
Earlier, it was stated that people tend to react to abstract 
photography on an instinctual or emotional level. Therefore, to create 
great abstract images, all one has to do is remove everything that does 
not, in some way, strengthen the viewer's emotional reaction. This is 
the art of subtraction.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 9: Art of Subtraction -- Before&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img height="267" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography/abstract-photography-1-9.jpg" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Figures 9 and 10 illustrate the art of subtraction. Figure 9 
shows a cluttered image. One's first reaction might be to move on to a 
more promising location. On the other hand, a closer examination of the 
scene shows that it has all three essentials for a good abstract image.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Form:&lt;/span&gt; Many of the rocks in the image have interesting form.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Color: &lt;/span&gt;The rock is a saturated red.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;span class="text_bold_italic"&gt;Curves:&lt;/span&gt; There are many curves running through the image.&lt;br /&gt;

    That is the good news. The bad news is that the scene has a ton 
of distracting detail. So, the goal becomes to keep form, color, and 
curves that can contribute to the creation of a good abstract image and 
remove everything else.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_break"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
&lt;span class="image_1ll_2"&gt;Figure 10: Art of Subtraction -- After&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="267" id="Placeholder8" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography/abstract-photography-1-10.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Figure 10 shows the scene after all the distracting detail has been 
removed. The image has isolated the important forms and accentuated them
 with the color and the curves.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;h3&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</description><thr:total xmlns:thr="http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0">0</thr:total><author>naswarman.com.pk@gmail.com (A A)</author></item><item><title>Abstract Photography</title><link>http://about-digital-photography-0.blogspot.com/2011/11/abstract-photography_5626.html</link><pubDate>Tue, 15 Nov 2011 03:07:00 -0800</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-2842667588749990803.post-7558110995423009304</guid><description>&lt;div dir="ltr" style="text-align: left;" trbidi="on"&gt;
&lt;div class="text_block"&gt;

    &lt;h1&gt;
&lt;/h1&gt;
&lt;h1&gt;
Part 2&lt;/h1&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
Article and Photography by Ron Bigelow&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new"&gt;

    &lt;h3 align="left"&gt;
Abstract Photography Techniques&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div align="left"&gt;
Part II of this series focuses on abstract 
photography techniques. Now, while each technique will be demonstrated 
with a photo of some particular subject matter, each one of these 
techniques can be used with many different types of subject matter. The 
goal is to learn the techniques and then apply them to whatever is found
 that will create impressive abstract images.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Selective Focus&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 1: Selective Focus&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="267" id="Placeholder" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography-2/abstract-photography-2-1.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Selective focus is one of the most common techniques used when 
creating abstract images. To apply this technique, a large aperture is 
used to create a very narrow depth of field. The camera is then focused 
on the center of interest of the image. Everything else will be out of 
focus.&lt;br /&gt;

    When using selective focus, there are a couple of ways that the 
technique can be made more effective. First, the color of the background
 should be different than the center of interest. This will make the 
center of interest stand out. Second, curves can be used to help direct 
the viewer's attention to the center of interest. Both of these methods 
can be seen in Figure 1.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_next"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Light and Shadows&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 2: Light and Shadows&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="266" id="Placeholder4" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography-2/abstract-photography-2-2.jpg" style="background-color: #990099;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Using the interplay of light and shadows can create drama in an 
image. Some photographers tend to think only in terms of light. This is a
 mistake -- for light is nothing without shadows. Shadows are not simply
 a dark mass that borders the light. Rather, shadows are an entity as 
alive as the light. It is the shadows that shape the light, that draw 
attention to the light, and that integrate with the light to produce 
striking photographic opportunities. This is particularly true with 
abstract images.&lt;br /&gt;

    When using this technique, the main purpose of the shadows is to 
enhance the forms in an image. Consequently, for this technique to be 
successful, it is necessary to start with very interesting or dramatic 
forms.&lt;br /&gt;

    Another thing to keep in mind with this technique is that it 
usually works best when the shadows are fairly dark. This creates the 
contrast that adds drama to an image.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Lines&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 3: Lines&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img height="267" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography-2/abstract-photography-2-3.jpg" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Lines can be very effectively used in abstract images. For this 
technique to be effective, the lines must be the dominant characteristic
 of the subject matter (see Figure 3). In a way, the lines almost become
 the center of interest.&lt;br /&gt;

    The lines must be either graceful or dynamic. In addition, all of
 the lines must work in harmony. Simply having a bunch of haphazard 
lines running in every which direction will not work.&lt;br /&gt;

    One last point is that, when using lines in this manner, it is 
usually best not to have overly strong, saturated, or contrasting colors
 in the image because this would detract from the lines and weaken the 
image.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_next"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Texture&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ls_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ls_2"&gt;
Figure 4: Texture&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="400" id="Placeholder2" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography-2/abstract-photography-2-4.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="267" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
A technique that is very similar to the use of lines is the use 
of texture. In fact, texture and lines are often used together (see 
Figure 4). To be used successfully, the texture must be one of the most 
dominant characteristics of the subject matter. Furthermore, the texture
 must work in harmony with any lines that are present.&lt;br /&gt;

    As when using lines, it is usually best not to have overly 
strong, saturated, or contrasting colors in the image in order to avoid 
having the colors detract from the texture.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Blur&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 5: Blur&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="283" id="Placeholder3" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography-2/abstract-photography-2-5.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;

    Deliberately blurring objects can create some interesting images.
 This technique works best with images that have a romantic or dreamy 
feel. Therefore, it is important to select the subject matter carefully.&lt;br /&gt;

    There are a number of ways that the blurring can be done. There 
are special soft focus lenses that produce soft images. This is how 
Figure 5 was created. Soft focus filters attached to regular lenses can 
also be used. For the cost conscious, panty hose stretched over the 
front of a lens also works. Of course, the blur can always be added 
during image editing with Photoshop (or any other editing software).&lt;br /&gt;

    As a last comment on this technique, deliberately blurred images 
often print best on matte paper. Matte paper produces a softer, gentler 
image than glossy or luster papers.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_next"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Zooming In&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 6: Zooming In&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img height="254" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography-2/abstract-photography-2-6.jpg" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
The zooming in technique requires a zoom lens. A long shutter 
speed is used, and the focal length of the zoom lens is changed during 
the exposure. Generally, the zoom is started at a wider angle and zoomed
 into a narrower angle. This produces the zoom effect seen in Figure 6.&lt;br /&gt;

    There are a few important points with this technique. A tripod 
should be used. Otherwise, there will be blurring caused by camera 
movement during the exposure. A strong center of interest is required. 
Without a strong center of interest, the image just ends up being a blur
 of lines with nothing to grab the viewer's attention. There should be a
 contrast of tone or color between the center of interest and the 
background. This will make the center of interest stand out. Last, this 
is a trial and error technique. It requires many images to be shot in 
order to produce one outstanding image.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Partial Object&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 7: Partial Object&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="400" id="Placeholder5" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography-2/abstract-photography-2-7.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="302" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
With the partial object technique, the entire object is not 
photographed. Rather, the image focuses on just a part of an object (see
 Figure 7). This technique depends heavily on form, color, and lines. 
The use of lines tends to be particularly important.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_next"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Photoshop Filters&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ls_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ls_2"&gt;
Figure 8: Photoshop Filters&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="400" id="Placeholder6" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography-2/abstract-photography-2-8.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="267" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Abstract images can also be created during image editing. An easy
 way to do this is to use Photoshop's filters. Photoshop has many 
filters that can be found in the Filter menu. The key here is to try 
different filters until one is found that produces an interesting 
abstract image.&lt;br /&gt;

    One thing to keep in mind is that abstract images created during editing often look best when printed on matte paper.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;h3&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</description><thr:total xmlns:thr="http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0">0</thr:total><author>naswarman.com.pk@gmail.com (A A)</author></item><item><title>Abstract Photography</title><link>http://about-digital-photography-0.blogspot.com/2011/11/abstract-photography_15.html</link><pubDate>Tue, 15 Nov 2011 03:07:00 -0800</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-2842667588749990803.post-6299578027165576448</guid><description>&lt;div dir="ltr" style="text-align: left;" trbidi="on"&gt;
&lt;div class="text_block"&gt;

    &lt;h1&gt;
&lt;/h1&gt;
&lt;h1&gt;
Part 3&lt;/h1&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
Article and Photography by Ron Bigelow&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new"&gt;

    &lt;h3 align="left"&gt;
Abstract Photography Subject Matter&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div align="left"&gt;
The last two articles in this series  concentrate on
 various subject matter to which abstract photography techniques can be 
applied.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Flowers&lt;/h3&gt;
Flowers are an excellent choice for abstract photography.  The 
main strengths of flowers are the colors and the lines. Therefore, these
  should be emphasized when creating abstract flower images. &lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 1: Strong Center of Interest&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="267" id="Placeholder" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography-3/abstract-photography-3-1.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Flower abstracts tend to fall into two categories: images  with a
 strong center of interest and images with either a weak center of  
interest or no center of interest at all. With flowers that have a 
strong  center of interest, the lines of the flower (e.g., the edges of 
the pedals) can  be used as leading lines to direct the viewer’s 
attention to the center of  interest (see Figure 1). With flowers that 
have a weak center of interest (or no center of interest), the lines 
become the main attraction in the  image. Thus, the lines must be 
composed in such a way that they are interesting  and draw the viewer’s 
attention (see Figure 2).&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_break"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 2: Weak Center of Interest&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="245" id="Placeholder4" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography-3/abstract-photography-3-2.jpg" style="background-color: #990099;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
A primary technique  for flower abstracts is the use of 
selective focus. This technique allows a  photographer to crop out all 
distracting detail and to draw attention to the  colors and lines that 
create the real value for the image  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_next"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
DVDs&lt;/h3&gt;
The recording sides of DVDs have an interesting property. They  
create a spectrum of colors when light is shined on them. This creates 
fun,  abstract photo opportunities.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 3: DVD&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img height="267" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography-3/abstract-photography-3-3.jpg" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
One opportunity involves  capturing the color as a  pure abstract
 (see Figure 3). The colors tend to be bold and saturated. This  makes 
for interesting color patterns. Another opportunity requires the DVD  to
 be used as a base on which other objects are placed. Some objects, such
 as  water drops, will pick up the color and reflect it (see Figure 4). 
With objects  that do not reflect the colors, the DVD provides a very 
vibrant background.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 4: DVD &amp;amp; Water Drops&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="267" id="Placeholder2" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography-3/abstract-photography-3-4.jpg" style="background-color: #990099;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Two factors will affect the colors that a DVD displays: the  light 
source and the angle of the DVD with respect to the light and the 
camera.  The best way to get a great shot with a DVD is to just play 
around with the  light source and angle until the right combination is 
found.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Sand Dunes&lt;/h3&gt;
Sand dunes are a lot of fun to photograph and are a natural  for 
abstract photography. There are a couple of main types of sand dune  
abstracts: normal/wide angle shots and close-ups.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 5: Sand Dunes&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="267" id="Placeholder3" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography-3/abstract-photography-3-5.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
The normal to wide angle shots tend to focus on form (see  Figure
 5). With these images, both the forms and lighting are critical. The  
forms must be interesting and the light must serve to enhance the forms.
  Consequently, these types of sand dune shots often use side lighting. 
This  means that the images need to be shot either early or late in the 
day when the  sun is low on the horizon.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 6: Sand Dunes&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="267" id="Placeholder5" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography-3/abstract-photography-3-6.jpg" style="background-color: #990099;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Close up shots usually emphasis either smaller forms or  texture 
(see Figure 6). Just like normal/wide angle shots, Close-up shots often 
 use side light. This augments the small forms or texture.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Buildings&lt;/h3&gt;
Buildings provide a rich source of opportunities for  abstract 
images. This is because they have a number of features that can lend  
themselves to an abstract interpretation:&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Shapes&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Lines&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Patterns&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Textures&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
Perhaps the most noticeable aspect of buildings is form. The  
overall structure of a building provides a form within which many 
sub-forms  exist. When concentrating on form, usually, only part of a 
form is revealed  in an abstract image. This is what gives the image it 
abstract quality and  creates a bit of mystique.&lt;br /&gt;

    Buildings have many prominent lines that can create abstract  
opportunities. For example, guardrails, edges of buildings, staircases, 
and hallways  all have lines that can be shot from interesting angles to
 create abstracts  images.&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1rs_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rs_2"&gt;
Figure 7: Broken Pattern with Building&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="400" id="Placeholder6" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography-3/abstract-photography-3-7.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="314" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Many buildings have interesting patterns. Even better is when  
the pattern is broken in some manner. This is the case in Figure 7 where
 the  pattern of a house made of bottles is broken by the window frame.&lt;br /&gt;

    Building textures provide the final abstract opportunity.  This 
usually means that a close-up shot is required. Examples of texture  
abstract opportunities can be found in stucco, weathered boards, and 
worn  cement.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_next"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Rock&lt;/h3&gt;
It is almost impossible to walk through an area of rock  
formations and not find abstract photography opportunities. The two 
primary  qualities that give rock its abstract feel are curves and 
color.&lt;br /&gt;

    With most rock formations, curves run throughout the  formations.
 It is just a matter of finding curves that catch the attention.  Often,
 graceful curves work best. In addition, many rock formations have a  
strong color. In fact, some areas are famous for the color of their rock
  (southern Utah for example).&lt;br /&gt;

    There are two approaches to capturing the color at its best.  The
 first approach is to photograph just after sunrise or before sunset. At
  this time, the light will, likely, be soft and have a warm tone that 
will bring  out the colors.&lt;br /&gt;

    
    &lt;div class="image_1ls_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ls_2"&gt;
Figure 8: Rock&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="400" id="Placeholder7" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography-3/abstract-photography-3-8.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="266" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
The second approach to capturing the color is to use  reflected 
light. Reflected light is light that has reflected off  some object  
before it illuminates the subject being photographed. For instance, the 
light  might reflect off a canyon wall then strike a rock formation. The
 advantage  with reflected light is that it picks up the color of the 
object from which it  reflects. As long as the color of the object from 
which the light reflects is  the same as the color of the object that is
 being photographed, the saturation  of the color is significantly 
enhanced. This is the case in figure 8. The light  reflected off a red, 
rock surface before striking the Indian ruins. This helped to  bring out
 the red color of the rock.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Around the House&lt;/h3&gt;
One of the best things about abstract photography is that  there 
are photographic opportunities virtually everywhere. Thus, abstract  
opportunities can be found in your home, backyard, and neighborhood. 
That means  that abstract photography is one of the  few fields of 
photography that is  not subject to the limitation of time (I don’t have
 the time to go on a photo  trip), money (I can’t afford a photo trip), 
or weather (I flew two thousand  miles to spend five days in a cabin 
while a torrential rainstorm poured  outside).&lt;br /&gt;

    
    &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_next"&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rs_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rs_2"&gt;
Figure 9: Around the House&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="400" id="Placeholder8" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography-3/abstract-photography-3-9.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="254" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
When photographing things in, or around, the house, it is  best to 
look for objects that have interesting form, color, or curves. In  
addition, the best abstract opportunities, around the house, frequently 
involve  photographing part of an object rather than the entire object.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;h3&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</description><thr:total xmlns:thr="http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0">0</thr:total><author>naswarman.com.pk@gmail.com (A A)</author></item><item><title>Abstract Photography</title><link>http://about-digital-photography-0.blogspot.com/2011/11/abstract-photography.html</link><pubDate>Tue, 15 Nov 2011 03:06:00 -0800</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-2842667588749990803.post-620099971108030817</guid><description>&lt;div dir="ltr" style="text-align: left;" trbidi="on"&gt;
&lt;div class="text_block"&gt;

    &lt;h1&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/h1&gt;
&lt;h1&gt;
Part 4&lt;/h1&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
Article and Photography by Ron Bigelow&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new"&gt;

    &lt;h3 align="left"&gt;
Abstract Photography Subject Matter -- Continued&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div align="left"&gt;
This last article in this series takes a look at a 
subject matter that is rich with opportunities for abstract photography:
 water. &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Flowing Water&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;

    &lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 1: Flowing Water&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="267" id="Placeholder" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography-4/abstract-photography-4-1.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Flowing water provides a wonderful opportunity for abstract  
images. The first step is to find a proper source of flowing water.  
Rivers, streams, and creeks work well. One of the most important things 
to look  for in the water is turbulence. It is the turbulence that 
disrupts the flow of  the water and provides interesting patterns that 
can be turned into abstract  images.&lt;br /&gt;

    Before the actual shooting starts, the white balance of the  
camera should be set properly. One of the white balance presets or a 
custom  white balance should be used. The Auto white balance is not a 
good choice, in  this case, as it may be inaccurate and cause color 
shifts in your images. With  the white balance presets or a custom white
 balance, your colors will be much  more accurate.&lt;br /&gt;

    Now comes the fun part – scouting out the water to find  
turbulence with an interesting pattern. When an interesting area has 
been found,  the camera should be set up on a tripod. A tripod is 
necessary because a long  shutter speed will be required to blur the 
water and get the abstract effect.&lt;br /&gt;

    The best shutter speed will vary from one shot to another as  the
 turbulence of the water differs. Consequently, it is best to experiment
 with  various shutter speeds. The best shutter speed will probably be 
somewhere between  about ½ second to 2 seconds. To experiment, just take
 a shot and review it on the  camera’s monitor. Then, make adjustments 
based on the results.&lt;br /&gt;

    Flowing water requires a trial and error approach. That  means 
that a lot of shots will, likely, need to be taken in order to get one  
outstanding image.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_next"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Sunset on Water &amp;amp; Sand&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 2: Sunset, Wet Sand, &amp;amp; Bird&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="267" id="Placeholder4" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography-4/abstract-photography-4-2.jpg" style="background-color: #990099;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
The light from a colorful sunset can create beautiful  abstract 
opportunities when it reflects off the wet sand of a beach. Of course, 
the  first step is to get to the beach before the sunset and scout out 
the area.&lt;br /&gt;

    The ripples formed on the sand as the waves recede back into  the
 ocean create very interesting patterns that provide great 
opportunities. Turbulence created in the water as it flows around rocks 
and other obstacles  can create great shots. In addition, animals along 
the beach provide many abstract prospects (see Figure 2)&lt;br /&gt;

    The proper white balance is critical for this type of shot.  The 
auto white balance option should not be used as this will desaturate the
 warm tones of the sunset light. The best option is to  use the 
daylight, white balance preset as this will create saturated, warm  
colors in the images.&lt;br /&gt;

    To capture the best colors and reflections, it will be  necessary
 to experiment with the angle of the camera to the sand. It may be  
necessary to get fairly low to capture the light at an angle that 
creates the  deep saturated colors on the sand.&lt;br /&gt;

    As with a lot of abstract subject matter, shooting the  
reflections on the wet sand is a trial and error approach. One of the 
best  strategies is to try a lot of different shots and pick the best 
ones when you  are done.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Water Surface&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 3: Water Surface&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="267" id="Placeholder2" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography-4/abstract-photography-4-3.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
One of the best opportunities for abstract images is the  surface
 of bodies of water (such as ponds, pools, or puddles). The surface  
reflects the surrounding environment, but it does so in a distorted way.
 Thus,  the result is a kind of abstract reflection of the world around 
the body of  water.&lt;br /&gt;

    Not any body of water will do. The water can not  be too 
disturbed. A certain degree of calmness is needed or there will be no  
recognizable reflection. Consequently, mornings are often preferable for
 this  type of shot because the wind is usually calmer in the morning 
than at other  times of the day.&lt;br /&gt;

    After a suitable body of water has been found, the next step  is 
to find an object around the water that will provide a reflection. Trees
 are  one of the most common objects used to for this purpose. In fact, 
trees work  especially well in autumn in those areas that have fall 
colors.&lt;br /&gt;

    The selection of the shutter speed is very important as it  
controls how the reflection will appear in an image. A long shutter 
speed (e.g., 1/2 to several seconds) will  smooth out any disturbances 
in the water and produce a more mirror-like  reflection (see Figure 3). 
On the other hand, a fast shutter speed will freeze the  disturbances 
and will create an irregular reflection. Thus, a fast shutter  speed 
works very well for those times when a distorted, extremely abstract  
reflection is desired.&lt;br /&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_next"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Reeds&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ll_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ll_2"&gt;
Figure 4: Reeds&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="267" id="Placeholder3" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography-4/abstract-photography-4-4.jpg" style="background-color: #990099;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
For this opportunity, as in the previous case, a calm body  of 
water is needed. The difference is that this opportunity requires some 
reeds  in the water. Now, there are two things to look for with this 
opportunity.  First, it is necessary to find a group of reeds with an 
interesting pattern (a  group of reeds with a triangular pattern often 
works well).&lt;br /&gt;

    Second, the water will probably reflect the sky. So, it is  
important to pick a time when the sky will provide a good reflection. 
There are  a couple of options here. In some cases, it is desirable to 
have a pattern of  clouds that will reflect in the water. In this case, 
the more dramatic the  clouds, the better the resulting image. In other 
cases, it is desirable to have  a plain reflection with no clouds. The 
best situation for this is a cloudless  morning or afternoon.&lt;br /&gt;

  When  shooting cloudless mornings or afternoons, there are two 
choices. The first choice is to  shoot right after any sunrise colors 
fade  or shortly before the sunset colors start. This will generally 
create a deep blue  reflection. This is great for creating a feeling of 
calm in an image. The other  choice is to shoot when the sunrise or 
sunset colors are at their peak. This will create a reflection with  
saturated warm tones of red, yellow, and orange. The result is an image 
that is  more dramatic.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_break"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Waves&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1rl1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1rl_2"&gt;
Figure 5: Waves&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="267" id="Placeholder5" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography-4/abstract-photography-4-5.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Waves are a lot of fun to photograph. Not surprisingly, it is  
necessary to start with a day that has some good wave action. So, it is 
always  a good idea to begin by checking the tide/surf reports before 
heading to the  beach.&lt;br /&gt;

    Also, it is important to pick the beach carefully. Some  beaches 
have surf that is very clear. This is great for creating wave images.  
On the other hand, some beaches have surf that is very muddy. These 
types of  beaches are not the best choices for wave photography.&lt;br /&gt;

    Unless one intends to stand in the surf, a long lens is  
required. If a really long lens is used, a tripod may be required. In 
this  case, a gimbal head that allows the camera to rotate to track the 
waves is a  big plus. For more moderate telephotos, the camera can be 
hand held if the  shutter speed is adequate to minimize the effects of 
camera motion.&lt;br /&gt;

    It is best to set the camera to a continuous shooting mode. This 
 way, a series of images can be captured as the wave moves. The best 
photo can  be chosen after the images have been captured.&lt;br /&gt;

  Shooting waves is another type of trial and error photography, so it 
is usually  necessary to take many shots in order to get one great 
image.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="section_new_next"&gt;

    &lt;h3&gt;
Water Drops&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;div class="image_1ls_1"&gt;

      &lt;div class="image_1ls_2"&gt;
Figure 6: Water Drops&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="image_border"&gt;
&lt;img alt="" height="400" id="Placeholder6" name="Placeholder" src="http://ronbigelow.com/articles/abstract-photography-4/abstract-photography-4-6.jpg" style="background-color: #9900cc;" width="267" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Water drops offer a plethora of abstract opportunities. Of  
course, it is necessary to move in close to the water drops. So, a 
camera with macro capability is generally required.&lt;br /&gt;

    When photographing outdoors, overcast days are best for water  
drop photography as it provides a gentle diffuse light source. In 
addition, it  is best to perform a custom white balance to get the most 
accurate color.&lt;br /&gt;

    Since the lens will be so close to the water drops, any  movement
 of the camera will be a problem. Thus, a tripod and shutter release  
are highly recommended. &lt;br /&gt;

    In most cases, it is a good idea to use a wide aperture.  This 
will blur the background and remove any distracting elements in the  
background.&lt;br /&gt;

    For most water drop photography, it is essential to have  
something to reflect in the water drop. After all, the reflection is 
what adds  the charm to the water drop image. One option is to shoot in a
 flower field  after a rainstorm. There will be plenty of raindrops as 
well as flowers that  can be used for reflections&lt;br /&gt;

  Unfortunately, not  all reflections are a good thing. Consequently, it
 is important to check for undesirable  reflections. For instance, it is
 not uncommon for the photographer and the  camera equipment to show up 
as a reflection. When undesirable reflections  occur, changing the angle
 of the camera may solve the problem.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;h3&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</description><thr:total xmlns:thr="http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0">0</thr:total><author>naswarman.com.pk@gmail.com (A A)</author></item><item><title/><link>http://about-digital-photography-0.blogspot.com/2011/11/1ds3-with-mamiya-35mm-f35-sekor-c-lens.html</link><pubDate>Tue, 15 Nov 2011 03:05:00 -0800</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-2842667588749990803.post-3772814588282349648</guid><description>&lt;div dir="ltr" style="text-align: left;" trbidi="on"&gt;
&lt;div align="center"&gt;
&lt;img alt="1ds3 with mamiya 35mm f3.5 sekor c lens" border="0" height="255" src="http://www.northlight-images.co.uk/content_images/mamiya-645-shift/35mm-shifted-up.jpg" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="tiny-text"&gt;

        &lt;div align="center"&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;a href="http://www.northlight-images.co.uk/reviews/lenses/m645-shift.html"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</description><thr:total xmlns:thr="http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0">0</thr:total><author>naswarman.com.pk@gmail.com (A A)</author></item><item><title>Club Photography: Photographing Bands, Musicians, Performers in Low Light</title><link>http://about-digital-photography-0.blogspot.com/2011/11/club-photography-photographing-bands.html</link><pubDate>Tue, 15 Nov 2011 03:04:00 -0800</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-2842667588749990803.post-435559018026138186</guid><description>&lt;div dir="ltr" style="text-align: left;" trbidi="on"&gt;
&lt;div id="intro"&gt;

            &lt;a href="http://photo.net/photodb/photo?photo_id=10488676"&gt;&lt;img border="0" src="http://thumbs.photo.net/photo/10488676-sm.jpg" /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
            &lt;h1&gt;
Club Photography: Photographing Bands, Musicians, Performers in Low Light&lt;/h1&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Going out to shows in clubs is fun. The music is often loud, the 
crowd is energized, people are drinking and the mood is on. You are 
there with your camera.  You can’t hear, you can’t find your way to the 
stage, people are banging into you while you try to shoot, it’s too 
dark, the lights are shining in your face. It feels like it would better
 if you just got your gear out of there and enjoyed the show. So what 
are you going to do?&lt;br /&gt;



 I shoot in clubs at least once a week, sometimes as many as four 
times, and sometimes in two different clubs in a night. I shoot for 
bands, performers, myself, and for publications, mostly online. I would 
be out shooting paid or not, I enjoy the music and almost always have 
the camera when I go out. The rare exceptions that I don’t have the 
camera are when I have paid for a seat or when I don’t have credentials 
and know they are required.  I’ve taught myself how to deal with all the
 problems that come up in clubs—blur, extreme contrast, lights directly 
into the camera, no light, mosh pit suddenly forming, beer in the camera
 bag, hit by flying objects. It’s not always easy but it seems like it’s
 almost always fun.&lt;br /&gt;



&lt;div class="gallery-illustration" style="float: right; width: 220px;"&gt;

&lt;a href="http://photo.net/photodb/photo?photo_id=10492282"&gt;&lt;img alt="Jeff Spirer - Dave X Stacy, T and A" border="0" height="150" src="http://thumbs.photo.net/photo/10492282-sm.jpg" width="200" /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;div class="title"&gt;
Dave X Stacy, T and A&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Questions about shooting bands, especially in clubs, pop up 
regularly on the forums here.  Several of us that have a lot of 
experience in this area have contributed to the forums but posts on 
forums sink in the listings. This article will offer suggestions based 
on my experience with some input from other photographers living in this
 environment.&lt;br /&gt;



 &lt;h2&gt;
Where to Start&lt;/h2&gt;
To begin with, you need a venue and a performance to shoot.  Because
 so many things change from venue to venue and between one performer and
 another and even between one performer from venue to venue, it’s 
important to have some feel for what you will be shooting. The first 
thing I do is research online the venue and the performers if it’s a 
first time for all of us. I look for photographs taken at past shows at 
the venue.  What matters most is the lighting and the stage setup. 
Because there is no dedicated area for photographers or press at clubs, 
you need to figure out where you can stand and shoot, what obstacles 
will be in your way, what you can stand on, and what lighting there is 
or isn’t. Things like color of walls and ceilings should be noted for 
bounce flash (more on that later), a balcony or stairs that can be a 
good location to shoot from, access to the back of the stage, these are 
the kinds of things to look for.&lt;br /&gt;



 With performers, it’s good to understand what they do on stage and 
what kind of crowd that will attract. I usually do a little background 
research on the performer/band via the web. I usually check out their 
myspace page—most bands are on there—and their websites. I look at 
photos of past shows to see what I might want to shoot and to see how 
they position themselves on stage. I pay special attention to the crowd 
in the photos of past shows, especially whether or not a pit forms where
 I might get slammed around or the equipment smashed. All of my 
equipment is insured but I worry about electrocuting people with a 
smashed flash or poking someone in the eye with a lens hood. I also look
 to see if crowds hang back, which gives me an opportunity to shoot up 
front, or if they press up against the stage, in which case I might look
 for a better spot for shooting.&lt;br /&gt;



&lt;div class="gallery-illustration" style="float: right; width: 220px;"&gt;

&lt;a href="http://photo.net/photodb/photo?photo_id=10488695"&gt;&lt;img alt="Jeff Spirer - Nekro Festival 1" border="0" height="150" src="http://thumbs.photo.net/photo/10488695-sm.jpg" width="200" /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;div class="title"&gt;
Nekro Festival 1&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;
Permission to Shoot&lt;/h4&gt;
I always shoot with permission. Usually I arrange it with the 
performers or their manager beforehand. In some local clubs, the people 
running the venue know me and I just ask performers after I get there. 
Sometimes, I show up to shoot one act and end up asking the others if 
it’s cool. I also ask ask about flash if it’s that type of venue. One 
place that restricts flash (although the performers can allow it) is a 
supper club with blues performers that I have shot in. It’s a bit 
different from the rock clubs and dive bars I live in, so I can 
understand the restriction. If a club requires a photo pass, make sure 
whoever gives you permission to shoot takes care of the pass. Smaller 
places rarely require a photo pass, anything bigger may.  When they get 
to the “three song rule,” it’s going to be a much bigger club.&lt;br /&gt;



 One thing I will strongly recommend against is shooting in venues as
 a ticket holder in a venue that doesn’t allow ticket holders to shoot. 
 The last thing you want is getting tossed out during the second song 
for popping out the &lt;span class="caps"&gt;DSLR&lt;/span&gt; and 300mm lens. It’s a big waste of money—just enjoy the show instead.&lt;br /&gt;



&lt;div class="gallery-illustration" style="float: right; width: 220px;"&gt;

&lt;a href="http://photo.net/photodb/photo?photo_id=10492281"&gt;&lt;img alt="Jeff Spirer - The Playlist" border="0" height="150" src="http://thumbs.photo.net/photo/10492281-sm.jpg" width="200" /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;div class="title"&gt;
The Playlist&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;
Equipment&lt;/h4&gt;
This is often the first question asked, and there are good reasons 
for it.  Too many people start out with equipment that is only going to 
make their job hard. Although there are ways to shoot in clubs with 
almost anything, there are limitations and it’s best to start with as 
few as possible. This is also the next thing to think about after you 
have researched the show.&lt;br /&gt;



 Let’s start with my kit and then I will explain how the equipment 
decisions should be made.  I will get to compact cameras and what you 
can do with them in clubs, since many people want to shoot with them.&lt;br /&gt;



 I take a digital camera body, either a Canon &lt;span class="caps"&gt;EOS 1D&lt;/span&gt;MkIII or a Canon &lt;span class="caps"&gt;EOS 40D&lt;/span&gt;.
  I only take two bodies if I’m shooting for pay. I take three prime 
lenses.  I always take a 35/2 and a 50/1.4 and then choose either a 
wider lens (20/2.8) or longer lens (85/1.8) depending on what I know 
about the venue. If I can’t get any good information in advance, I take 
the wider lens. I take a 580EXII flash.  Before I had the 580, I took 
bounce cards – because the 580 has one built-in, I no longer do that.  I
 take a spare battery, two if the one in the camera is low, and plenty 
of rechargeable batteries for the flash.  I take at least 8GB of memory.
  This is usually more than I need, but you never know. I take business 
cards, and most importantly, I take &lt;strong&gt;earplugs&lt;/strong&gt;.  Even if 
my camera dies, I can stay and listen with earplugs, but without them, I
 won’t usually get near the stage. I have several pairs in every camera 
bag I own. Many clubs have earplugs, so if you forget them, you can ask 
at the bar.  As a sufferer of tinnitus, I can tell you that going to 
loud shows without earplugs for enough years is not something anyone 
should do. I also take a small flashlight, which has been extremely 
useful.&lt;br /&gt;



&lt;div class="gallery-illustration" style="float: right; width: 153px;"&gt;

&lt;a href="http://photo.net/photodb/photo?photo_id=10488750"&gt;&lt;img alt="Jeff Spirer - Flamingo Gunfight" border="0" height="199" src="http://thumbs.photo.net/photo/10488750-sm.jpg" width="133" /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;div class="title"&gt;
Flamingo Gunfight&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
One more thing on my equipment, and then I will discuss what you 
should consider. I always use both a clear filter and a lens hood. The 
reason for this is simple. I have been hit with spraying booze, dropping
 booze, real and fake blood, sweat, silly string, and a few other 
substances that have left me wondering. I have had my gear slammed, both
 at my side and against my face, and I have had it pushed into the 
stage, amps, and mic stands. Just like earplugs, a little protection 
will save you a lot of aggravation.&lt;br /&gt;



 In list form, my equipment bag contains the following:&lt;br /&gt;



 &lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span class="caps"&gt;DSLR &lt;/span&gt;(either a Canon &lt;span class="caps"&gt;EOS 1D&lt;/span&gt;MkIII or Canon &lt;span class="caps"&gt;EOS 40D&lt;/span&gt;)&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;35/2&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;50/1.4&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;either a 20/2.8 or 85/1.8&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;580EXII flash&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;spare camera battery&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;extra rechargeable batteries for the flash&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;memory cards (at least 8GB)&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;business cards&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;earplugs&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;clear lens filter and lens hood on every lens&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</description><thr:total xmlns:thr="http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0">0</thr:total><author>naswarman.com.pk@gmail.com (A A)</author></item><item><title>Photography Technique</title><link>http://about-digital-photography-0.blogspot.com/2011/11/photography-technique.html</link><pubDate>Tue, 15 Nov 2011 03:03:00 -0800</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-2842667588749990803.post-6117792190846526336</guid><description>&lt;div dir="ltr" style="text-align: left;" trbidi="on"&gt;
&lt;h1&gt;
&lt;/h1&gt;
&lt;div class="learn-font"&gt;

                Every type of photography requires a separate set of 
skills and photography equipment (although some overlap). 
                With these Photography Technique Overview guides on 
photo.net, we look to impart some of these skills to you, whether the 
subject you're interested in is Macro Photography, Architectural Photography, Portrait Photography, Nature Photography,
 etc. 
                Each article offers tips on how best to approach the 
subject, example photographs, and even suggests photography gear to use.
 
                As with any creative pursuit, it's important to find 
your niche, but also important to keep exploring, keep building skills, 
continue to challenge yourself to learn new techniques. 
                These articles may help you do so.
            &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</description><thr:total xmlns:thr="http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0">0</thr:total><author>naswarman.com.pk@gmail.com (A A)</author></item><item><title>Wedding Photography</title><link>http://about-digital-photography-0.blogspot.com/2011/11/wedding-photography.html</link><pubDate>Tue, 15 Nov 2011 03:01:00 -0800</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-2842667588749990803.post-4619353012494731917</guid><description>&lt;div dir="ltr" style="text-align: left;" trbidi="on"&gt;
&lt;h1&gt;
&lt;/h1&gt;
&lt;div class="learn-font"&gt;

Wedding photography is a rare lucrative career in photography. 
Unfortunately, with digital photography, there are more and more 
amateurs posing as professionals out there, but if you really are 
interested in breaking into this business of wedding photography, learn 
all you can, apprentice with an established wedding photographer, and 
most importantly train your eye to see those special moments. If you 
have questions about gear, read the photo.net Wedding Photography Equipment Guide. How about Pricing Structure or Wedding Digital Workflow? We put together an entire series on the Business of Wedding Photography, which is an invaluable resource. The Wedding Photography Insights with Jeff Ascough
 shares a lot of tips on wedding photography from one of the top ten 
wedding photographers in the world. Our best advice to you: keep pushing
 your boundaries on your photographic creativity and talent, 
interpersonal skills, and marketing potential and you'll go far in this 
business of wedding photography.&amp;nbsp;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="learn-font"&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="learn-font"&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="learn-font"&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class="learn-font"&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;h1&gt;


Business of Wedding Photography
&lt;/h1&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
Topic #3: Web sites for the professional wedding photographer&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;a href="http://photo.net/shared/community-member?user_id=453741"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;div class="gallery-illustration" style="float: right; width: 172px;"&gt;

&lt;a href="http://photo.net/photodb/photo?photo_id=5624888"&gt;&lt;img alt="Marc Williams - &amp;quot;Throw-back to the 1930s&amp;quot;" border="0" height="200" src="http://thumbs.photo.net/photo/5624888-sm.jpg" width="152" /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;div class="credit"&gt;
Marc Williams&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
The Business of Wedding Photography is an extensive subject, best
answered by a team of professional wedding photographers, who also
happen to be star photo.net members. In this article, these
professional photographers have contributed advice and personal
experience gained from running wedding businesses. Not only have they
provided wedding photography tips, but they also included example
wedding photos of dresses, rings, ceremonies, and more. Whether you
are just entering the field of wedding photography, or are a seasoned
professional, the tips and insights shared here should be helpful with
your own wedding photography business.  &lt;br /&gt;



We asked our panel of experts the following questions:
&lt;br /&gt;




&lt;h2 id="effective_site"&gt;
An effective wedding photography web site&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;i&gt;What are the most important elements for an effective wedding
photography web site?&lt;/i&gt;&lt;br /&gt;


Jeff
Ascough: Simple interface, good clear images, and a sense of style
and individuality. Template sites are not such a good idea as they
promote mediocrity and make photographers look the same.&lt;br /&gt;


Josh
Root: Images, images, images, and information. People don't seem
to care if they are fancy flash pages or simple HTML ones, just as
long as the images and information are there. Other features that
clients seem to like: a page that introduces you,
your photographic history, and a calendar that shows your booked and
open dates.&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;div class="gallery-illustration" style="float: right; width: 219px;"&gt;

&lt;a href="http://photo.net/photodb/photo?photo_id=6686520"&gt;&lt;img alt="David Wegwart - Denver/CO. - Untitled" border="0" height="133" src="http://thumbs.photo.net/photo/6686520-sm.jpg" width="199" /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;div class="credit"&gt;
David Wegwart - Denver/CO.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
Conrad
Erb: It should show your work. That sounds elementary, but far too
many beginning photographers have a home page with a huge paragraph of
text that reads like this, "John Smith is very passionate about
photography. Since he was a little boy, he has been using cameras to
capture every precious moment..." Talk is cheap, and when I see a
photographer who has too much text on the front page of their site, I
get suspicious that they aren't very good.  Too many photographers
have cheesy bios with the words "precious," "capture," or
"passionate". It gets old, very quickly.
Writers write. Photographers show.  If you are passionate,
&lt;i&gt;show&lt;/i&gt; me your passion. If you capture moments,
&lt;i&gt;show&lt;/i&gt; me those moments, don't just tell me about it.
&lt;br /&gt;


Michael
Mowery: Simplicity, lots of great photography, no pricing on the
site.&lt;br /&gt;


Marc
Williams: The photography itself. Often the more words, the lesser
the work. Contact info and something about price to target the right
clients is also important.&lt;br /&gt;


Nadine
Ohara: Since I don't have a web site yet, that would be the most
important to have now. I also believe the most important elements are
the photographs themselves, then contact and pricing info.&lt;br /&gt;


David
Wegwart: An eye-catching initial photograph and menu
layout. Pictures, and more pictures. When I look at stats from my own
site, the area that is hit over and over is the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;div class="gallery-illustration" style="float: right; width: 219px;"&gt;

&lt;a href="http://photo.net/photodb/photo?photo_id=6288256"&gt;&lt;img alt="Josh Root - The groomsmen" border="0" height="133" src="http://thumbs.photo.net/photo/6288256-sm.jpg" width="199" /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;div class="credit"&gt;
Josh Root&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;h2 id="web_design"&gt;
Designing a photography web site&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;i&gt;Did you design your own web site or hire a designer?&lt;/i&gt;&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;a href="http://photo.net/shared/community-member?user_id=648995"&gt;Jeff
Ascough&lt;/a&gt;: I used a designer: Brian Crouch at &lt;a href="http://www.skooks.com/"&gt;Skooks&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;a href="http://photo.net/shared/community-member?user_id=20462"&gt;Josh
Root&lt;/a&gt;: I did it myself. If I were doing it again, I would pay
someone. Mine is functional, but not the greatest.&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;a href="http://photo.net/shared/community-member?user_id=1118563"&gt;Conrad
Erb&lt;/a&gt;: I have always designed my own site. It took me a while to get
there, and probably would have been a better investment from the start
to hire a designer or use a basic flash template, but I enjoy learning
new things like HTML and CSS and prefer having total
control over my site.&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;a href="http://photo.net/shared/community-member?user_id=1471453"&gt;Michael
Mowery&lt;/a&gt;: &lt;a href="http://www.livebooks.com/"&gt;Livebooks.com&lt;/a&gt; are
awesome. They allow you to design and redesign at will.&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;a href="http://photo.net/shared/community-member?user_id=453741"&gt;Marc
Williams&lt;/a&gt;: I do the initial design because I'm an art director, but
differ to the experts on structure and flow. My site is badly in need
of updating, like the Cobbler's children going without shoes.&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;div class="gallery-illustration" style="float: right; width: 153px;"&gt;

&lt;a href="http://photo.net/photodb/photo?photo_id=6640682"&gt;&lt;img alt="Nadine Ohara - SF Bay Area/CA - Untitled" border="0" height="199" src="http://thumbs.photo.net/photo/6640682-sm.jpg" width="133" /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;div class="credit"&gt;
Nadine Ohara - SF Bay Area/CA&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;a href="http://photo.net/shared/community-member?user_id=271274"&gt;Nadine
Ohara&lt;/a&gt;: I will be buying a template. I don't have the time to
learn how to make my own, plus the current templates seem to be able
to do the job.&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;a href="http://photo.net/shared/community-member?user_id=817037"&gt;David
Wegwart&lt;/a&gt;: I used a template that I liked. It's a few years old now
and I need to update it.&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;h2 id="proofing"&gt;
Photo proofing and print sales&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;i&gt;Do you offer proofing and/or print sales from your web
site?&lt;/i&gt;&lt;br /&gt;


Jeff
Ascough: Yes, we have a Skooks Kart.&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;a href="http://photo.net/shared/community-member?user_id=20462"&gt;Josh
Root&lt;/a&gt;: No, I do not.&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;a href="http://photo.net/shared/community-member?user_id=1118563"&gt;Conrad
Erb&lt;/a&gt;: Yes. I used to use Pictage, but after a variety of negative
experiences with them, I switched to &lt;a href="http://www.smugmug.com/"&gt;Smugmug&lt;/a&gt;. Smugmug is much easier to
use for my clients and myself and is much more affordable without all
of the heavy handed marketing that Pictage did. Yes, there are many
good choices out there, but I never researched them because I was so
pleased with Smugmug.&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;a href="http://photo.net/shared/community-member?user_id=1471453"&gt;Michael
Mowery&lt;/a&gt;: I currently offer web proofing and will offer print sales
from my web site in the near future.&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;a href="http://photo.net/shared/community-member?user_id=453741"&gt;Marc
Williams&lt;/a&gt;: No, I do not at this time.&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;div class="gallery-illustration" style="float: right; width: 220px;"&gt;

&lt;a href="http://photo.net/photodb/photo?photo_id=6555264"&gt;&lt;img alt="Jeff Ascough - Untitled" border="0" height="133" src="http://thumbs.photo.net/photo/6555264-sm.jpg" width="200" /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;div class="credit"&gt;
Jeff Ascough&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;a href="http://photo.net/shared/community-member?user_id=271274"&gt;Nadine
Ohara&lt;/a&gt;: I will probably offer online hosting and sales from the
site, but will use my current pro lab's service and provide a
link.&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;a href="http://photo.net/shared/community-member?user_id=817037"&gt;David
Wegwart&lt;/a&gt;: No. However, I have a link that takes clients to the
gallery
area for their wedding images. From that site they can order up to
8x10 prints, but have to contact me for larger ones if they &lt;/div&gt;</description><thr:total xmlns:thr="http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0">0</thr:total><author>naswarman.com.pk@gmail.com (A A)</author></item><item><title>Great Black-n-White Photos From Colour Film</title><link>http://about-digital-photography-0.blogspot.com/2011/11/great-black-n-white-photos-from-colour.html</link><pubDate>Tue, 15 Nov 2011 03:00:00 -0800</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-2842667588749990803.post-8539775929098832858</guid><description>&lt;div dir="ltr" style="text-align: left;" trbidi="on"&gt;
&lt;span style="font-family: arial; font-size: small;"&gt;
&lt;span style="font-family: arial; font-size: x-small;"&gt;
&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;span style="font-family: arial; font-size: small;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: arial; font-size: x-small;"&gt;
Text and photography Copyright Darwin Wiggett&lt;br /&gt;All rights reserved.
&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;span style="font-family: arial; font-size: small;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: arial; font-size: x-small;"&gt;
&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: arial; font-size: small;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: arial; font-size: x-small;"&gt;
I tried but I was never any good. I had the film, I had the specialty
 filters, I even had the darkroom with a condenser enlarger and fibre 
based papers… it didn’t matter, I just couldn’t pull off a decent 
black-n-white photo. The problem was I couldn’t pre-visualize 
black-n-white in a colour world. So I did the easy thing, I gave up, and
 kept shooting with colour film. Luckily I did, because in today’s 
digital environment, colour film offers more flexibility in building 
amazing black-n-white photos than does black-n-white film itself. So, 
for want-to-be b&amp;amp;w shooters like me, there is a  hidden b&amp;amp;w 
world built into colour photography that would make even the best 
b&amp;amp;w shooters envious. Let’s take a deeper look into the gray tones 
of colour.&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;b&gt;RGB means Flexibility&lt;/b&gt;&lt;br /&gt;


Images captured in most digital cameras and scanners are recorded as 
different ranges of grayscale tones in each of the three colour channels
 (red, green, and blue or RGB). These three channels of black-n-white 
information when combined make up a colour image (see Photo 1).  If you 
look at each of the grayscale channels separately, you get three very 
different looking black-n-white images. Herein lies the flexibility of 
using colour to make b&amp;amp;w images.  You can take the best parts of the
 separate red, green, and blue channels and mix them together into a 
wonderful mélange of tones that’ll blow away the best that black-n-white
 film has to offer.  Let’s look at a few ways we can mix things up.&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" style="width: 700px;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td width="700"&gt;
&lt;span style="font-family: arial; font-size: xx-small;"&gt;
&amp;nbsp;Photo 1
&lt;img alt="Photo 1" border="0" height="246" src="http://www.naturephotographers.net/articles0103/dw0103-1.jpg" width="700" /&gt;
&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;span style="font-family: arial; font-size: x-small;"&gt;

&lt;b&gt;RGB to Grayscale is Easy&lt;/b&gt;&lt;br /&gt;


In most photo editing software programs, there is often an easy way 
to convert an RGB image to a ‘grayscale’ or b&amp;amp;w image. Most programs
 have a formula where the software takes proportions of each of the 
three channels and mixes the tones to give a final grayscale image. In 
Photoshop, the conversion factor is 59% of the green, 30% of the red and
 11% of the blue channel for conversion to black-n-white 
(Image&amp;gt;Mode&amp;gt;Grayscale). In this software conversion, we get a 
grayscale image from the original (see photo 2A), but usually the result
 is not as exciting as it could be if we took more control of the mix. 
Photo 2B is the simple grayscale conversion done in Photoshop.&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;b&gt;Pick Your Own Ingredients&lt;/b&gt;&lt;br /&gt;


The best thing to do when first planning a strategy for b&amp;amp;w 
conversion is to take a look at the separate channels to see what you 
have. In Photoshop, bring up the channels palette (Windows&amp;gt;Show 
Channels) and click on each channel separately to view. Often one of the
 channels will stand out. If you see one channel that absolutely sings, 
just target that channel by clicking on it and then go to 
Image&amp;gt;Mode&amp;gt;Grayscale and Photoshop will discard the other two 
channels of the colour image and make a grayscale image using only the 
information from the selected channel. For landscape photos, I often 
find that the red channel or green channel alone will yield some amazing
 effects. So before doing any grayscale conversion, do a little channel 
surfing first to see what you have to work with.&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;b&gt; Blending Two Channels&lt;/b&gt;&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;table align="right" border="0" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="0" style="width: 270px;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td width="270"&gt;
&lt;span style="font-family: arial; font-size: xx-small;"&gt;
&amp;nbsp;Photo 2A
&lt;img alt="Photo 2A" border="0" height="176" src="http://www.naturephotographers.net/articles0103/dw0103-2.jpg" width="260" /&gt;
&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td width="270"&gt;
&lt;span style="font-family: arial; font-size: xx-small;"&gt;
&amp;nbsp;Photo 2B
&lt;img alt="Photo 2B" border="0" height="176" src="http://www.naturephotographers.net/articles0103/dw0103-3.jpg" width="260" /&gt;
&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td width="270"&gt;
&lt;span style="font-family: arial; font-size: xx-small;"&gt;
&amp;nbsp;Photo 2C
&lt;img alt="Photo 2C" border="0" height="176" src="http://www.naturephotographers.net/articles0103/dw0103-4.jpg" width="260" /&gt;
&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td width="270"&gt;
&lt;span style="font-family: arial; font-size: xx-small;"&gt;
&amp;nbsp;Photo 2D
&lt;img alt="Photo 2D" border="0" height="176" src="http://www.naturephotographers.net/articles0103/dw0103-5.jpg" width="260" /&gt;
&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td width="270"&gt;
&lt;span style="font-family: arial; font-size: xx-small;"&gt;
&amp;nbsp;Photo 2E
&lt;img alt="Photo 2E" border="0" height="176" src="http://www.naturephotographers.net/articles0103/dw0103-6.jpg" width="260" /&gt;
&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;
Often two channels (usually the red and the green) make interesting 
black and white images, but a better image would result from a 
combination of both. To mix both channels, I often resort to one of my 
favorite tools in Photoshop, the calculations command. This little image
 modifier lets you pick your two favorite channels and mix them in any 
proportion and in any manner of blending you desire. To use it go to: 
Image&amp;gt;Calculations. In the dialog box that follows, you chose which 
two channels you want to mix and how you want to blend them (which 
blending mode). I play with different percentages of opacity between the
 channels and use ‘normal’ blending mode until I get an effect I like 
(see Photo 2C, a 50-50 blend of the red and green channel). Make sure 
you specify Results&amp;gt;New Document so Photoshop will know to make a 
separate grayscale image from your calculations blend. The resulting 
image is actually a lone channel and it needs to be converted to 
grayscale before it can be used further (to do so just go to 
Image&amp;gt;Mode&amp;gt;Grayscale) &lt;br /&gt;


&lt;b&gt;Blending Three Channels&lt;/b&gt;&lt;br /&gt;


If you like the information in all three channels and want to mix up 
things in an effective manner, try the channel Mixer command in 
Photoshop (Image&amp;gt;Adjust&amp;gt;Channel Mixer). Here you can mix the 
channels in infinite combinations of opacities using all three channels.
 The key here is to make sure you have the ‘monochrome’ box checked and 
to remember one important rule: for optimal image quality make sure the 
percentages chosen in all three channels adds up to 100% (e.g. red 60%, 
green 30% and blue 10% or even red 200%, green –70%, and blue –30%). The
 channel mixer takes a bit of playing with to understand how it works, 
but if you remember the 100% rule you can come up with some pretty 
amazing effects (see Photo 2D).&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;b&gt;Blending Three Channels Selectively&lt;/b&gt;&lt;br /&gt;


Of the techniques described here, this is the most flexible because 
it allows you to take parts of channels and blend them together into one
 image. So, say you like the sky from the red channel, you love the 
flowers from the blue channel, but you like the mountains in the green 
channel (as in Photo 1)… with this technique you can have all of it in 
one, in any manner you like. No other b&amp;amp;w technique offers as much 
control and flexibility as this one. &lt;br /&gt;


Your goal is to make a new document and make the individual channels 
from the original document into ‘layers’. Layers are like different 
copies of the image stacked one on top of the other. Think of slides 
stacked in a pile on a light table and you’ve got layers. In Photoshop 
you can turn down the opacity of each image and blend them in any 
combination or order you want. So, just like in the channel mixer, you 
could use different levels of opacity to blend the three layers to give 
you a variety of effects.  The real power of layers is that you can 
selectively ‘erase’ parts of one layer and reveal what is in the layer 
or layers below. Using this feature (called ‘layer masks’) allows one to
 pick the best parts of each channel (now in the form of layers) and 
build the best black-n-white image possible. This is an advanced 
Photoshop technique, so if you are a beginner you’ll need to learn about
 layers and layer masks before trying the steps outlined below:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ol&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Click on the first channel in your document (the red channel) in the
 channels palette. Copy this channel to your computer’s clipboard 
(Select&amp;gt;All, then Edit&amp;gt;Copy). Create a new document (File&amp;gt;New, 
then press OK). Photoshop makes a new document the correct size. Now 
paste the information from the clipboard into the new document 
(Edit&amp;gt;Paste) and voila, a new layer in a new document is created from
 the red channel.
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Go back to the original colour document, target the green 
channel by clicking on it, and repeat step 1 above (Select&amp;gt;All, then 
Edit&amp;gt;Copy). Now go to the new document and paste the green channel 
into it (Edit&amp;gt;Paste). Repeat these steps for the blue channel.
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;The result will be three layers in a new document based on the old document’s channels.
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Simply by varying the order of the layers (dragging one layer 
above another) and playing with the layer opacity sliders you can blend 
the three layers anyway you like. This works just like the channel mixer
 but is more intuitive.
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;For the ultimate in control add layer masks (Layer&amp;gt;Add Layer
 Mask&amp;gt;Reveal All) to the top two layers. Wherever you paint on the 
layer mask with a black brush, the underlying layer from below is 
revealed. By planning the ordering of your layers carefully and using 
layer masks, you can paint away the areas you don’t like and reveal 
areas from the layers below that you do like. If you make a mistake, 
just paint over the area with white and the original layer information 
returns. Layer masks add the ultimate in flexibility. Layer masks take a
 bit of practice to use and understand, so again, if this is all new to 
you get out the Photoshop tutorial and learn how to use layers and layer
 masks.  You’ll be glad you did.
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Finally, flatten the image to remove the layers. Photo 2E is 
the final result where I took the best info from all three channels and 
selectively blended them into one photo. Often I will reconvert the 
resulting grayscale image back to RGB and then add a colour tone, like 
you would to a darkroom print.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;


Photo 3 is a composite image of my landscape photo, converted using 
the channel mixer method, and a wolf shot of Tom Kitchin’s where I used 
only the green channel information. Using different methods of b+w 
conversion in the same image gave me the best photo possible. I used 
layers and layer masks to montage the two images and then selectively 
toned the image with colour.&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" style="width: 700px;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td width="700"&gt;
&lt;span style="font-family: arial; font-size: xx-small;"&gt;
&amp;nbsp;Photo 3
&lt;img alt="Photo 3" border="0" height="293" src="http://www.naturephotographers.net/articles0103/dw0103-7.jpg" width="700" /&gt;
&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;span style="font-family: arial; font-size: x-small;"&gt;


Today’s imaging software makes conversion of colour images to 
black-n-white a snap, but like any simple “push a button” approach, you 
lose flexibility to add your own vision to the mix. By using channels or
 channels as layers and selectively doing your own tonal blending, you 
will be that much closer to producing your own black-n-white 
masterpieces. &lt;/span&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</description><thr:total xmlns:thr="http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0">0</thr:total><author>naswarman.com.pk@gmail.com (A A)</author></item><item><title>In-Camera Metering</title><link>http://about-digital-photography-0.blogspot.com/2011/11/in-camera-metering.html</link><pubDate>Tue, 15 Nov 2011 02:59:00 -0800</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-2842667588749990803.post-6780701759656062878</guid><description>&lt;div dir="ltr" style="text-align: left;" trbidi="on"&gt;
&lt;h1&gt;
In-Camera Metering&lt;/h1&gt;
&lt;strong&gt;by nm&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;em&gt;NYIP's newest student advisor, George Delgado, is a professional 
photographer, and an NYIP graduate.  In addition to running a portrait 
and wedding photography business here in New York City, George  has a 
wide variety of experience in business and an extensive background in 
the aviation industry including stints as a pilot and aviation 
instructor.  In his first article for NYIP. com, George takes up the 
issue of metering for proper exposure.  Welcome George!
&lt;/em&gt;&lt;br /&gt;


We've had a lot of questions from students about using their camera's
 built-in light meter.  Here's an overview which we hope will give you a
 basic understanding of the subject.  We're going to cover three aspects
 of in-camera metering; a General Overview, Metering Modes, and some 
Tricks and Tips to Use of Your Camera's Light Meter more effectively.&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;h2&gt;
General Overview — What your Camera's Meter "Sees"&lt;/h2&gt;
Light meters are color-blind.  The light meter sees every scene as if
 it were an average, medium gray, halfway between black and white.  So 
the meter always assumes that the scene is average in tone and 
reflectance.  In many scenes, that's OK.  As long as the light and dark 
areas in the scene are within the exposure latitude of the film or the 
digital camera's sensor you'll probably get an acceptable exposure.  
Bright highlights in one part of the frame may be balanced by dark 
shadows in other areas, as well as mid tones that fall between the 
extremes, and the overall average may be that medium gray that the meter
 thinks it's looking at.&lt;br /&gt;



But when you frame a subject in the viewfinder, the camera's light 
meter has absolutely no idea whether you are photographing a blonde 
bride in a pure white wedding gown against a pale background on bright 
day, or a black bear in a very dark shady forest.  All the meter "sees" 
is how much light is striking its sensor, and it assumes the scene 
averages out to medium gray.  And with pale brides or black bears, that 
can lead to exposure errors.  In its attempt to render every scene as 
medium gray in tone, the meter will tend to overexpose dark subjects, 
making them appear lighter and underexpose light subjects, making them 
look darker.&lt;br /&gt;
  

One of the ways to get better exposures is to meter a gray card, 
rather than the subject.  The meter's assumption that the scene is 
medium gray will be matched by having the meter actually measure light 
reflected off a medium gray card.  Just make sure the light hitting the 
card is the same quality of light on the subject, and you should get a 
good exposure.&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;h2&gt;
Metering Modes&lt;/h2&gt;
Let's move on to discuss Metering Modes.  The metering Mode 
determines which part of the frame the light meter is reading and how 
the meter is going to calculate "correct" exposure.  By selecting the 
best metering mode you may be able to fine-tune the reading to better 
suit your subject matter.  Camera manufacturers may use different words 
to describe these modes, but the three basic choices are Evaluative , 
Center-Weighted Average, and Spot.&lt;br /&gt;


Evaluative metering — also called Matrix Metering — depends on 
complex algorithmic calculations performed by your camera's computer 
chip.  It breaks the scene down into individual segments, measures the 
light in each segment, and compares it to templates programmed into the 
cameras computer chip.  If it "sees" that the upper 2/3 of the scene 
averages 2 stops brighter than the bottom third, and that there's fairly
 constant line of demarcation between the two, it may say "aha — I bet 
that's a landscape and the top is sky and the bottom is land.  I have an
 algorithm to calculate exposures for landscapes, so that's what I'll 
use".  So, as the name Evaluative Metering indicates, in this mode the 
light meter is programmed to evaluate the scene, look for a 
corresponding template, and apply that template to the exposure 
calculation.  It works surprisingly well most of the time, but it's far 
from foolproof. &lt;br /&gt;
 

Center Weighted Average (CWA) is a less sophisticated approach that 
assumes whatever is centered in the frame is the main subject, so it 
calculates an average that gives more importance to whatever is in the 
middle of the frame.  That's probably good for many "snapshots" but if 
you are composing your photographs artistically, the most important 
element in your composition may be off-center, following the Rule of 
Thirds or your own sense of artistic composition.  In that situation CWA
 may give you an incorrect reading.&lt;br /&gt;


Finally, there's Spot Metering.  In the Spot Metering mode only a 
tiny area of the frame is metered, typically just 2% to 4% of the whole 
scene.  Most cameras (read your User's Manual to understand how your 
particular model works) let you choose which of the focus points will be
 metered, allowing you to compose your photograph in the viewfinder and 
meter just the area immediately around the focus point you have 
selected, and ignoring the rest of the exposure information in the 
frame.  Remember the blonde bride in a white dress against a light 
background on a sunny day?  Many portrait and wedding photographers have
 learned that spot-metering the subject's cheek, just below the eye, 
gives them a good reading in what can be a challenging situation.&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;div class="images"&gt;

 &lt;a href="http://www.nyip.com/images/photoworld/oct11/meteringa1011_lg.jpg" rel="shadowbox"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Over exposed metering" border="0" src="http://www.nyip.com/images/photoworld/oct11/meteringa1011_sm.jpg" /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a href="http://www.nyip.com/images/photoworld/oct11/meteringb1011_lg.jpg" rel="shadowbox"&gt;
&lt;img alt="Correct metering" border="0" src="http://www.nyip.com/images/photoworld/oct11/meteringb1011_sm.jpg" /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
Whichever mode you select, the general goal is to "center" the 
indicator in the viewfinder for a good exposure.  As a creative 
photographer you also have the option of "tweaking" the exposure by 
changing the aperture or shutter speed  to deliberately under or 
overexpose the image a bit to achieve a better result.  Moving the 
indicator to the "plus" side by slowing the shutter speed or opening the
 aperture increases the exposure and will lighten the image; moving the 
indicator to the "minus" side by increasing shutter speed or closing 
down the aperture will reduce the exposure and the image will be darker.&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;h2&gt;
Tips and Tricks&lt;/h2&gt;
1. Use a gray card when you are in tricky lighting situations.  You 
might think that this technique would work well with brides, but not 
with bears.  Not so.  While you can't get the bear to hold a gray card 
for you, you can meter the gray card without approaching the bear — just
 get the card in the same kind of light and it will give you an accurate
 exposure reading.&lt;br /&gt;


2. Meter what matters most.  If you are photographing a scene that 
has a high dynamic range of more than 8 or 9 "stops" of exposure 
difference between the lightest and darkest area, it may exceed the 
exposure latitude of your film or digital sensor.  So you may have to 
decide what is most important and expose for that part of the frame.  If
 you're doing portrait photography, the subject's face is probably the 
most important part of the composition.  Spot Meter the subject's cheek,
 or fill the viewfinder with your subject's face by zooming in or 
walking up to the subject, manually set the exposure, then move back to 
reframe the subject.  Don't worry if your camera won't focus on the 
subject if you get too close.  The light meter is independent of focus, 
so it will still give you a good reading, even when you're too close to 
focus.  At a wedding, it's more important to capture the detail in the 
bride's white dress than to preserve shadow detail of the groom's black 
tuxedo, so you can choose to expose for the highlights, and not worry 
about the shadows being too dark.&lt;br /&gt;


3. Learn to see and understand challenging lighting situations.  Use 
your training and judgment.  Is the scene you have framed in the 
viewfinder much darker or lighter than medium gray?  Classic examples of
 images that are lighter are white snow or powder sand beaches.  In 
those situations, you know that the meter may be "tricked" and your 
image could be underexposed if the meter needle is centered.  You may 
need to move the needle a click or two to the "plus" side by opening the
 aperture, slowing the shutter, or increasing ISO.   Scenes that are 
darker than medium gray — the black bear in the woods — may come out 
overexposed and you'll need to move the needle a bit to the "minus" side
 by selecting a smaller aperture, faster shutter speed, or lower ISO.  
Warning!  While many in-camera meters follow the standard convention of 
"plus" being to the right of center, and "minus" being to the left, one 
major manufacturer switches that around, so be sure to check if you are 
using a new camera for the first time! &lt;br /&gt;
 

4. Use the histogram on the back of your camera if you're a digital 
shooter, to supplement the information the meter is giving you.  Is the 
histogram way off to the right or left?  This will tell you if you are 
losing detail on the highlight or shadow areas of the image, and you can
 adjust your exposure accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;


5.  Bracket your exposure.  When in doubt, consider bracketing your 
exposure, taking three successive images, one with the meter needle 
centered, one deliberately "overexposed" and a third deliberately 
"underexposed".  With most modern SLRs you can choose Auto Exposure 
Bracketing, and the camera will do the work of changing the exposure 
settings for you.  Be aware that there's a big extra cost to bracketing.
  Film photographers will triple their film and print costs, using up 
three frames instead of one, and digital photographers will use three 
times more memory and may spend three times longer in their post 
production efforts.  If you are editing 3,000 frames from a wedding or 
vacation trip, instead of 1,000, that's a lot of extra money, time and 
effort! &lt;br /&gt;
    

Proper exposure is elemental to good photography.  We hope this 
overview on using your camera's built-in light meter will help you "nail
 it" more consistently.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;div style="background-color: white; border: medium none; color: black; overflow: hidden; text-align: left; text-decoration: none;"&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</description><thr:total xmlns:thr="http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0">0</thr:total><author>naswarman.com.pk@gmail.com (A A)</author></item></channel></rss>